tgo manual vol1

338
Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1

Upload: tatiana-corsino

Post on 06-Mar-2015

172 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: TGO Manual Vol1

Trimble Geomatics OfficeUser Guide

Volume 1

Page 2: TGO Manual Vol1
Page 3: TGO Manual Vol1

Version 1.5Part Number 39328-10-ENG

Revision AJanuary 2001

Trimble Geomatics OfficeUser Guide

Volume 1

Page 4: TGO Manual Vol1

Corporate Office

Trimble Navigation LimitedTechnical Publications Group645 North Mary AvenuePost Office Box 3642Sunnyvale, CA 94088-3642U.S.A.Phone: +1-408-481-8940, 1-800-545-7762Fax: +1-408-481-7744www.trimble.com

Copyright and Trademarks

© 1999–2001, Trimble Navigation Limited. All rights reserved. For STL support, the Trimble Geomatics Office software uses the Moscow Center for SPARC Technology adaptation of the SGI Standard Template Library. Copyright © 1994 Hewlett-Packard Company, Copyright © 1996, 97 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc., Copyright © 1997 Moscow Center for SPARC Technology. Printed in the United States of America, on recycled paper.

The Sextant logo with Trimble, and GPS Pathfinder, are trademarks of Trimble Navigation Limited, registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office.

The Globe & Triangle logo with Trimble, Convert to RINEX, Coordinate System Manager, Data Dictionary Editor, DC File Editor, DTMLink, Feature and Attribute Editor, Grid Factory, GPSurvey, Line Type Editor, QuickPlan, RoadLink, Symbol Editor, Trimble Geomatics Office, Trimble Survey Controller, Trimble Survey Office, TRIMMAP, TRIMNET, TSC1, and WAVE are trademarks of Trimble Navigation Limited.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Release Notice

This is the January 2001 release (Revision A) of Volume 1 of the Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide, part number 39328-10-ENG. It applies to version 1.5 of the Trimble Geomatics Office software.

Patents

The Trimble Geomatics Office software is covered by the following U.S. patents: 5614913, 5969708, 5986604, and other patents pending.

The following limited warranties give you specific legal rights. You may have others, which vary from state/jurisdiction to state/jurisdiction.

Software and Firmware Limited Warranty

Trimble warrants that this Trimble software product (the “Software”) shall substantially conform to Trimble’s applicable published specifications for the Software for a period of ninety (90) days, starting from the date of delivery.

Warranty Remedies

Trimble's sole liability and your exclusive remedy under the warranties set forth above shall be, at Trimble’s option, to repair or replace any Product or Software that fails to conform to such warranty (“Nonconforming Product”) or refund the purchase price paid by you for any such Nonconforming Product, upon your return of any Nonconforming Product to Trimble.

Page 5: TGO Manual Vol1

Warranty Exclusions

These warranties shall be applied only in the event and to the extent that: (i) the Products and Software are properly and correctly installed, configured, interfaced, stored, maintained and operated in accordance with Trimble’s relevant operator’s manual and specifications, and; (ii) the Products and Software are not modified or misused. The preceding warranties shall not apply to, and Trimble shall not be responsible for, any claim of warranty infringement is based on (i) defects or performance problems that arise from the combination or utilization of the Product or Software with products, information, systems or devices not made, supplied or specified by Trimble; (ii) the operation of the Product or Software under any specification other than, or in addition to, Trimble’s standard specifications for its products; (iii) the unauthorized modification or use of the Product or Software; (iv) damage caused by lightning, other electrical discharge, or fresh or salt water immersion or spray; or (v) normal wear and tear on consumable parts (e.g., batteries).

THE WARRANTIES ABOVE STATE TRIMBLE’S ENTIRE LIABILITY AND YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE. EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS AGREEMENT, TRIMBLE FURNISHES THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE AS-IS, WITH NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND THERE IS EXPRESSLY EXCLUDED THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE STATED EXPRESS WARRANTIES ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES ON THE PART OF TRIMBLE ARISING OUT OF, OR IN CONNECTION WITH, ANY PRODUCTS OR SOFTWARE. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON DURATION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

Limitation of Liability

TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, TRIMBLE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCE OR LEGAL THEORY RELATING IN ANY WAY TO THE PRODUCTS OR SOFTWARE, REGARDLESS WHETHER TRIMBLE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF ANY SUCH LOSS AND REGARDLESS OF THE COURSE OF DEALING WHICH DEVELOPS OR HAS DEVELOPED BETWEEN YOU AND TRIMBLE. BECAUSE SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

IN ANY CASE, TRIMBLE’S SOLE LIABILITY, AND YOUR SOLE REMEDY UNDER OR FOR BREACH OF THIS AGREEMENT, WILL BE LIMITED TO THE REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OR LICENSE FEE PAID FOR THE PRODUCTS OR SOFTWARE.

Page 6: TGO Manual Vol1
Page 7: TGO Manual Vol1

ContentsPlease See Volume 2 for Chapters 11–17

and Appendixes A–B

About This ManualRelated Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxTechnical Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiYour Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiDocument Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxii

1 IntroductionIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Key Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Using the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Trimble Geomatics Office Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Folder Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

2 Using the Trimble Geomatics Office SoftwareIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Starting the Trimble Geomatics Office Software . . . . . . . . . . . . 10The Trimble Geomatics Office Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

The Project Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12The Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

The Survey View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Other Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

The Plan View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 v

Page 8: TGO Manual Vol1

Contents

ToolTips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Shortcut Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Exiting the Trimble Geomatics Office Software . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

3 Setting up a ProjectIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Creating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Opening an Existing Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Changing the Project Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Changing the Project Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Selecting a Coordinate System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Selecting the Project Units and Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Setting up a Project for Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Changing the Reporting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Changing the Recomputation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Deleting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Copying a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Using Project Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Selecting a Template for a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Creating a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

4 Using a Coordinate SystemIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40The Coordinate System Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Using Geoid Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Geoid Grid (*.ggf) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Using a Geoid Model to Determine the Elevation for

GPS Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Selecting a Geoid Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Viewing the Current Coordinate System Details . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

vi Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 9: TGO Manual Vol1

Contents

Changing the Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Selecting a Coordinate System from the Coordinate System

wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Selecting a Coordinate System in a Survey Controller (*.dc) File 52Using a Scale Factor-Only Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . 54Using a Default Transverse Mercator Projection . . . . . . . . 55

Saving the Current Coordinate System as a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Ground Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Entering Project Location Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Setting the Ground Scale Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

5 Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office SoftwareIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Importing ASCII Data Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Using Custom ASCII Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Events That May Occur When Importing Data Files . . . . . . . . . . 69

Managing Duplicate Points When Importing Data . . . . . . . 70Resolving Duplicate Points in the Database . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Import Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73The Project Details Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74The Messages Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74The Recompute Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Example: Importing a PacSoft File Containing Control Points. . . . . 75

6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller SoftwareIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Transferring Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Survey Controller (*.dc) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Geoid Grid (*.ggf) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Subgridding a Geoid Grid (*.ggf) File from an Existing GeoidGrid File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Transferring an Existing Geoid Grid (*.ggf) File . . . . . . . . 88

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 vii

Page 10: TGO Manual Vol1

Contents

Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Creating a Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) File . . . . . . . . . 89Transferring an Existing Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) File . . 94

Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Data Dictionary (*.ddf) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Digital Terrain Model (*.dtx) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Antenna Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101UK National Grid Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office SoftwareIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Importing Survey Controller (*.dc) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Importing .dc Files from the Trimble Survey ControllerSoftware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Importing .dc Files on Your Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Events That May Occur When Importing .dc Files . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Messages and Dialogs That May Appear During Import . . . . 112Trimble Survey Controller Classes and How They

Are Imported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Qualities Assigned to Coordinates from the Trimble

Survey Controller Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Qualities Assigned to Observations from the Trimble

Survey Controller Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Managing Duplicate Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Importing Trimble GPS Data (*.dat) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Importing .dat Files from the Trimble Survey Controller

Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Importing .dat Files from a Trimble GPS Receiver . . . . . . . 119Importing .dat Files from Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

vi i i Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 11: TGO Manual Vol1

Contents

Events That May Occur When Importing .dat Files . . . . . . . . . . 125Messages and Dialogs That May Appear During Import . . . . 125How the Trimble Geomatics Office Software Assigns Qualities

to Imported Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Managing Points with Duplicate Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Importing RINEX Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Importing NGS Data Sheet Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Importing Digital Level Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Digital Level Import Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Editing Starting Point Elevations Before Importing . . . . . . . 134

Import Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136The Project Details Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137The Messages Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137The Recompute Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting EntitiesIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Graphics Window to

View a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Using the Zoom Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Labeling Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Using View Filters in the Survey View . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Viewing Survey Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Viewing Grid Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Setting the Color Scheme in the Graphics Window . . . . . . . 148Viewing Background Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Selecting Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Selecting All or None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Selecting Entities Using the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Selecting Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Selecting Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Selecting Duplicate Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Selecting Staked Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 ix

Page 12: TGO Manual Vol1

Contents

Selecting Calibration Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Selecting Entities in the Plan View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Selecting Entities Using Wildcards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Selecting Entities Using Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Using Selection Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

9 Viewing and Editing DataIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Properties Window Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Viewing Survey Data in the Properties window . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Using Pages to View Survey Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Viewing and Editing Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Viewing Survey Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Point Quality Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Viewing the Point Derivation Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Entering Coordinates for a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Viewing Stakeout Information for a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Viewing CAD Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Renaming Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Viewing Observations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191GPS Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Conventional Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Level Observations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Laser Rangefinder Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Azimuth Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Reduced Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Viewing Erroneous Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202GPS Loop Closures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Editing Survey Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Changing the Status of Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Reversing the Direction of Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

x Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 13: TGO Manual Vol1

Contents

Editing Multiple Entities at One Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Editing the Survey-Related Properties of Selected Entities . . . 211Editing the CAD-Related Properties of Selected Entities . . . . 213

Using the Data Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Viewing the Inverse Between Two Points . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Measuring Positions Within the Graphics Window . . . . . . . 217

Viewing Note Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Viewing CAD Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Linework (Lines, Arcs, Curves) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Annotations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

10 GPS Site CalibrationIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Selecting the Calibration Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Computing a Datum Transformation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Updating Default Projection Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Computing a Horizontal Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Computing a Vertical Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Selecting the Calibration Point Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Selecting Calibration Point Pairs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Computing the Calibration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Analyzing the Calibration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Viewing a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Calibration Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Applying the Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Using a GPS Site Calibration in Future Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 xi

Page 14: TGO Manual Vol1

Contents

11 Feature Code ProcessingIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Feature and Attribute Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Transferring a Feature and Attribute Library to the Trimble

Survey Controller Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Transferring the Survey Controller (*.dc) File to a Trimble

Geomatics Office Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Processing Feature Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Undoing Feature Code Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318The Feature Code Processing Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

12 Using the Plan ViewIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Selecting Entities in a Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Creating New Layers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Editing Existing Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Deleting Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Creating Layers Using the Feature and Attribute Editor Utility . 326

CAD Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Creating CAD Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Editing Existing CAD Styles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Deleting CAD Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Creating CAD Styles Using the Feature and Attribute

Editor Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Annotation Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Creating Annotation Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332Editing Annotation Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Deleting Annotation Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Creating Annotation Templates Using the Feature and

Attribute Editor Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

xi i Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 15: TGO Manual Vol1

Contents

13 Adding Entities to the ProjectIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338Adding Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Adding Points by Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338Adding Points by Azimuth and Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Adding and Editing Azimuth Observations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Adding Linework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Adding Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345Adding Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Adding Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Adding Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352Adding Annotations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354Cutting, or Copying, and Pasting Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

14 Reporting on the ProjectIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358Additional Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Points Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359Stakeout Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Level Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362Report Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

15 Exporting to Third-Party Software FormatsIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366Export Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366Exporting to a Third-Party Software Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370Exporting NGS Bluebook Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372Exporting Using the Trimble Data Exchange Format . . . . . . . . . 374

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 xi i i

Page 16: TGO Manual Vol1

Contents

16 Using Attributes in the Trimble Geomatics Office SoftwareIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378Defining Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378Setting up a Project for Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381Exporting a Feature and Attribute Library to the Trimble Survey

Controller Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383Collecting Attribute Information in the Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383Importing a Data Collector (*.dc) File Containing Attributes . . . . . 384Using Data Dictionary (*.ddf) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Using Data Dictionary (*.ddf) Files for Defining Attributes . . 385Setting up a Project for Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385Exporting a Data Dictionary (*.ddf) File to the Trimble Survey

Controller Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385Managing Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

Viewing Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386Editing Attribute Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387Adding Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388Deleting Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Cutting, or Copying, and Pasting Points with Attributes . . . . . . . . 389Reporting Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Creating a Custom Report Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391Selecting Points to Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395Running the Custom Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Exporting Attributes to an ASCII Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Exporting Features and Attributes to a Geographic Information

System (GIS) Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397GIS Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397Exporting Data to a GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

xiv Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 17: TGO Manual Vol1

Contents

17 UtilitiesIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400Trimble Data Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Using the Data Transfer Utility from the Trimble GeomaticsOffice Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Using the Standalone Data Transfer Utility . . . . . . . . . . . 402Setting Up Devices Using the Data Transfer Utility . . . . . . . 402Managing Your Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Coordinate System Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410When to Use the Coordinate System Manager Utility . . . . . . 410Using the Coordinate System Manager Utility . . . . . . . . . 411Using the Coordinate System Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

Symbol Editor and Line Type Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420When to Use the Symbol Editor or the Line Type Editor

Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420Using the Symbol Editor and Line Type Editor Utilities . . . . 421Using Symbols and Line Types in the Trimble Geomatics

Office Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423Feature and Attribute Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

When to Use the Feature and Attribute Editor Utility . . . . . . 425Using the Feature and Attribute Editor Utility . . . . . . . . . . 426Using a Feature and Attribute Library in the Trimble

Geomatics Office Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443DC File Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

When to Use the DC File Editor Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444QuickPlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

When to Use the QuickPlan Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446Before Using the QuickPlan Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447Using the QuickPlan Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448Exiting the QuickPlan Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

Convert to RINEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455When to Use the Convert to RINEX Utility . . . . . . . . . . . 455Selecting Folders and Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 xv

Page 18: TGO Manual Vol1

Contents

Configuring the RINEX Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 Using the Header Field Override Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . 461Using the Controls Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463Creating the RINEX Conversion File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

A1 Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465Files Supported by the A1 Viewer Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

Grid Factory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467NGS Antenna Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

A Custom Import, Export, and Report FormatsIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470Field Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472Other Field Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

Custom Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474Format Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474Format Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474Format Footer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474Custom Format Definition Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

Creating an Export Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

xvi Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 19: TGO Manual Vol1

Contents

B RecomputationIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484How a Recomputation Determines the Calculated Positions for

Observed Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485How a Recomputation Determines Potential Starting Points . . 487How a Recomputation Determines the Position and Quality

for all Potential Starting Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488How a Recomputation Uses the Component Qualities to

Determine the Current Starting Point . . . . . . . . . . . 492How a Recomputation Applies Observations from the

Current Starting Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494GPS Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494Conventional and Laser Rangefinder Observations . . . . . . . 496How Delta Elevations are Applied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499An Example of a Recomputation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

How a Recomputation Uses Multiple Observations and Coordinatesfor a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502Multiple Observations to a Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502Multiple Observations to Sideshot Points . . . . . . . . . . . . 503Multiple Observations and Meaning Coordinates . . . . . . . . 504Multiple Observations to Traverse Points . . . . . . . . . . . . 508Points with Keyed-in Coordinates and Observations . . . . . . 509

How a Recomputation Determines the Quality of Observed Points . . 510Autonomous Base Position for Real-Time Kinematic Surveys . 511

Points Moved or Adjusted Using the Trimble Geomatics OfficeSoftware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

Project Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 xvii

Page 20: TGO Manual Vol1

Contents

Using the Recompute Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513The Project Details Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515The Errors and Warnings Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515The Point Derivations Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516The Starting Points Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518The Traverse Report Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519The Survey Data Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

Glossary

Index

xvii i Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 21: TGO Manual Vol1

About This ManualWelcome to the Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide. This manual describes how to install, set up, and use the Trimble Geomatics Office software. The Trimble Geomatics Office™ software lets you process the fieldwork from the Trimble Survey Controller™ software.

Even if you have used other Global Positioning System (GPS) products before, Trimble recommends that you spend some time reading this manual to learn about the special features of this product.

If you are not familiar with GPS, visit our web site for an interactive look at Trimble and GPS at:

• www.trimble.com

Trimble assumes that you are familiar with Microsoft Windows and know how to use a mouse, select options from menus and dialogs, make selections from lists, and refer to online help.

The following sections provide you with a guide to this manual, as well as to other documentation that you may have received with this product.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 xix

Page 22: TGO Manual Vol1

About This Manual

Related InformationOther manuals in this set include:

• Trimble Geomatics Office – DTMLink User Guide

This manual describes how to set up and use the DTMLink™ software. This software is a powerful tool for creating new surfaces and editing previously created surfaces.

• Trimble Geomatics Office – RoadLink User Guide

This manual introduces you to the RoadLink™ software. The RoadLink software is part of the Trimble Geomatics Office software. It is a powerful reduction and processing package that calculates cut and fill volumes for earthworks between the road design and the Contour Surface Model.

• Trimble Geomatics Office – WAVE Baseline Processing User Guide

This manual describes how to set up and use the WAVE™ Baseline Processing module, if you have this module installed. This module lets you process raw GPS field data collected using static, FastStatic, or kinematic survey techniques.

• Trimble Geomatics Office – Network Adjustment User Guide

This manual describes how to set up and use the Trimble Network Adjustment module, if you have this module installed. This module lets you adjust your GPS survey data to estimate and reduce the inherent errors.

As well as being supplied in hardcopy, these manuals are also available in portable document format (PDF). These are available on the Trimble Geomatics Office CD.

Other sources of related information are:

• Help – the software has built-in, context-sensitive help that lets you quickly find the information you need. You can access it from the Help menu, by clicking the Help button in a dialog, or by pressing ����.

xx Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 23: TGO Manual Vol1

About This Manual

• Release notes – the release notes describe new features of the product, information not included in the manuals, and any changes to the manuals. They are provided as a PDF file on the CD. Use Adobe Acrobat Reader to view the contents of the release notes.

• ftp.trimble.com – use the Trimble FTP site to send files or to receive files such as software patches, utilities, service bulletins, and FAQs. Alternatively, access the FTP site from the Trimble web site at www.trimble.com/support/support.htm.

• Trimble training courses – consider a training course to help you use your GPS system to its fullest potential. For more information, visit the Trimble web site at www.trimble.com/support/training.htm.

Technical AssistanceIf you have a problem and cannot find the information you need in the product documentation, contact your local Distributor. Alternatively, do one of the following:

• Request technical support using the Trimble web site at www.trimble.com/support/support.htm

• Send an e-mail to [email protected].

Your CommentsYour feedback about the supporting documentation helps us to improve it with each revision. To forward your comments, do one of the following:

• Send an e-mail to [email protected].

• Complete the Reader Comment Form at the back of this manual and mail it according to the instructions at the bottom of the form.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 xxi

Page 24: TGO Manual Vol1

About This Manual

If the reader comment form is not available, send comments and suggestions to the address in the front of this manual. Please mark it Attention: Technical Publications Group.

Document ConventionsThe document conventions are as follows:

Convention Definition

Italics Identifies software menus, menu commands, dialog boxes, and the dialog box fields.

Helvetica Narrow Represents messages printed on the screen.

Helvetica Bold Identifies a software command button, or represents information that you must type in a software screen or window.

“Select Italics / Italics” Identifies the sequence of menus, commands, or dialog boxes that you must choose in order to reach a given screen.

������ Is an example of a hardware function key that you must press on a personal computer (PC). If you must press more than one of these at the same time, this is represented by a plus sign, for example, ������+���.

xxii Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 25: TGO Manual Vol1

C H A P T E R

1

1 Introduction

In this chapter:

Q Introduction

Q Key features

Q Using the software

Q Getting started

Q Folder structure

Page 26: TGO Manual Vol1

1 Introduction

1.1 IntroductionWelcome to the Trimble Geomatics Office™ software from Trimble Navigation Limited.

Geomatics is the design, collection, storage, analysis, display, and retrieval of spatial information. The collection of spatial information can be from a variety of sources, including GPS and terrestrial methods. Geomatics integrates traditional surveying with new technology-driven approaches, making geomatics useful for a vast number of applications.

The Trimble Geomatics Office software is a link and survey reduction package. It provides a seamless link between your field work and design software. The software includes an extensive feature set which helps you to verify your field work quickly, and easily perform survey-related tasks and export your data to a third-party design package.

The Trimble Geomatics Office software integrates the functionality offered in both the Trimble Survey Office™ and GPSurvey™ software.

1.2 Key FeaturesSome of the key features of the Trimble Geomatics Office version 1.5 software are as follows:

• An integrated WAVE™ baseline processing module

• An integrated raw GPS data editor for investigating GPS data

• A Windows-based network adjustment module for GPS and terrestrial data

• Two project views—Survey and Plan—for displaying data

• A project bar in the main graphics window which provides shortcuts to frequently performed tasks

• HTML reports for easier review and interpretation of data

2 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 27: TGO Manual Vol1

Introduction 1

• Enhanced, seamless transfer of data collected from GPS receivers, conventional total stations, levels, and laser rangefinders.

• A Properties window with which to view and edit information for points and observation types

• Extensive project selecting, viewing, and editing functions that allow users to filter out observation types for analysis

• Layer support to help manage data

• Extensive import and export formats for transfer of data from a variety of sources

• GIS data collection support for expanding high-accuracy GIS data collection capabilities, and allowing use of data dictionary files, including files created in the GPS Pathfinder® Office software

• RoadLink™ and DTMLink™ modules for viewing and editing third-party road design files, and creating digital terrain models

1.3 Using the SoftwareUse the Trimble Geomatics Office software for tasks such as:

• GPS baseline processing (if you have the WAVE Baseline Processing module installed)

• Survey network adjustment (if you have the Network Adjustment module installed)

• The processing of GPS and conventional topographic survey data

• Quality assurance and quality control of data (QA/QC)

• Road design data import and export

• Survey data import and export

• Digital terrain modeling and contouring

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 3

Page 28: TGO Manual Vol1

1 Introduction

• Datum transformation and projections

• GIS data capture and data export

• Feature code processing

• Project reporting

• Survey project management

� Warning – The Trimble Geomatics Office software stores its data in a Microsoft Access version 9.0 database (filename TGO_V150.mdb in the Project folder). Microsoft Access 2000 uses version 9.0 database. Trimble Navigation Limited reserves the right to modify the structure of the database at any time. This may affect users who develop applications to interact directly with the Access database.

Figure 1.1 on the next page shows the typical workflow for a project, and where in the manual set to find the instructions for each task.

4 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 29: TGO Manual Vol1

Introduction 1

Figure 1.1 Project workflow and manual structure

Set up project and select coordinate system - *chapters 3 & 4

Import data files - chapter 5

Transfer files to the Trimble Survey Controller softwarefor fieldwork - chapter 6

Complete fieldwork

Transfer fieldwork files - chapter 7

Check and edit observations - chapters 8 & 9

*All chapters

refer to the Trimble

Geomatics Office User

Guide unless

otherwise noted.

Process GPS baselines - WAVE Baseline Processing

User Guide - chapter 2

View raw GPS data using Timeline - WAVE Baseline Processing

User Guide - chapter 5

Perform a Network Adjustment - Network Adjustment

User Guide - chapter 2

Perform a GPS site calibration - chapter 10

Process feature codes - chapter 11

Edit the project in the Plan view - chapters 12 & 13

Produce database reports - chapter 14

Export to a third-party format - chapter 15

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 5

Page 30: TGO Manual Vol1

1 Introduction

1.4 Getting StartedTrimble recommends that, before you get started, you read this chapter. This will help you to get the most out of the Trimble Geomatics Office software. After reading this chapter and installing the software, work through Chapter 2, Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Software, and Chapter 3, Setting up a Project.

The remaining chapters describe the extended functionality of the Trimble Geomatics Office software.

1.4.1 Trimble Geomatics Office Help

The Trimble Geomatics Office software and its accompanying utilities include extensive online help. Become familiar with the relevant sections in the manual before starting, and then use the Help for in-depth answers to any questions.

Printing Help topics

To print the current Help topic, do one of the following:

• Click Print.

• Select File / Print Topic.

• In the Help window, right-click to access the shortcut menu, and then select Print Topic.

Note – You can only print individual topics.

To print information in a pop-up window:

• In the pop-up window, right-click to access the shortcut menu, and then select Print Topic.

6 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 31: TGO Manual Vol1

Introduction 1

1.5 Folder StructureDuring the installation process, all files required by the Trimble Geomatics Office software are copied into the folders listed in Table 1.1.

Table 1.1 Location of files

Folder What it stores

\Program Files\Trimble\Trimble Geomatics Office

Trimble Geomatics Office Program and Help files

...\System System files; including the Feature and Attribute Library software files, Symbol Editor™ and Line Type Editor™ utilities, and HTML report templates

...\Template Project template files

...\Utility Links to Convert to RINEX™, Coordinate System Manager™, Data Transfer, DC File Editor™, Feature and Attribute Editor™, Line Type Editor, QuickPlan™, and Symbol Editor utilities

...\RoadLink – DTMLink Program files and associated files for RoadLink and DTMLink

\Program Files\Common Files\Trimble

Files used by other Trimble products in addition to the Trimble Geomatics Office software

...\GeoData Coordinate system information and Geoid files

...\GeoDB Coordinate System Manager program files

...\Data Transfer Data Transfer program files

...\DatToRinex Convert to RINEX program files

...\DCeditor DC File Editor program files

...\Plan QuickPlan program files

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 7

Page 32: TGO Manual Vol1

1 Introduction

8 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 33: TGO Manual Vol1

C H A P T E R

2

2 Using the Trimble Geomatics Office SoftwareIn this chapter:

Q Introduction

Q Starting the Trimble Geomatics Office software

Q The Trimble Geomatics Office window

Q The Survey view

Q The Plan view

Q ToolTips

Q Shortcut menus

Q Pointers

Q Exiting the Trimble Geomatics Office software

Page 34: TGO Manual Vol1

2 Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

2.1 IntroductionThis chapter shows you how to start the software and how to use the two views included in the Trimble Geomatics Office graphics window—the main screen of the software. For information about how to use the various tools and icons in the graphics window, see Chapter 8, Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities.

2.2 Starting the Trimble Geomatics Office SoftwareTo start the Trimble Geomatics Office software:

• Click and then select Programs / Trimble Geomatics Office / Trimble Geomatics Office.

The Trimble Geomatics Office window appears.

2.3 The Trimble Geomatics Office WindowThe Trimble Geomatics Office window includes the main graphics window (which displays project data), menus, and toolbars.

There are two views—Survey and Plan. In each view the available menus, menu commands, and toolbars are different.

To switch between the Survey and Plan views, do one of the following:

• In the toolbar, select the Survey View tool or the Plan View tool.

• Select View / Survey or View / Plan.

For more information, see The Survey View, page 15 and The Plan View, page 19. For information about the different menus, menu commands, and toolbars, refer to the Help.

Figure 2.1 shows the parts of the Trimble Geomatics Office window that are common to both views. The following sections describe the different parts of the Trimble Geomatics Office window.

10 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 35: TGO Manual Vol1

Using the Trim

ble Geom

atics Office S

oftware 2

Trimble G

eomatics O

ffice User G

uide – Volum

e 111

buttons

Toolbars

Graphicswindow

Window corner

System

Figure 2.1 Parts of the graphics window common to both views

Project name

Zoom navigator window

Projectbar

Menu commands

Status bar

Page 36: TGO Manual Vol1

2 Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

2.3.1 The Project Bar

The project bar is located on the left side of the Trimble Geomatics Office window. It contains named groups (for example, the Trimble Survey group) that list shortcuts to commonly performed tasks. These groups follow a general work flow.

Figure 2.2 shows the parts of the project bar. You can click the drop-down arrow to show the rest of the shortcuts in a group. Click a shortcut to perform a task. For example, click the Survey Device shortcut to transfer data from a device to the Trimble Geomatics Office project.

Figure 2.2 Items in the project bar

Trimble surveyshortcuts

Drop-downarrow

Other groups

12 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 37: TGO Manual Vol1

Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 2

To show or hide the project bar, do one of the following:

• In the toolbar, click the Project Bar icon.

• Select View / Project Bar.

When there is no project open, the Projects and Utilities groups are available. When a project is open, only the Utilities group is unavailable.

The zoom navigator

The zoom navigator is a small window located at the bottom of the project bar. It reflects the data displayed in the main Trimble Geomatics Office graphics window. If you use any of the zoom tools in the main window, the zoom navigator changes to reflect this. It is a convenient display of the extents of your project.

You can show or hide the zoom navigator within the project bar. To do this:

• In the project bar, right-click to access the shortcut menu and then select Zoom Navigator.

To use the zoom navigator:

• Click an area of the project in the zoom navigator. This area becomes the center of the main graphics window.

To use the zoom navigator to zoom:

• In the zoom navigator, drag a box around the area of interest. The main graphics window displays the same data.

When you point to the middle of the box in the zoom navigator, the pointer becomes a . This means that you can drag the box over the project area without changing the zoom. The view of the project in the main graphics window reflects these movements.

� Tip – If you have a mouse with a wheel, you can use the wheel to change the size of the zoom navigator box.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 13

Page 38: TGO Manual Vol1

2 Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

2.3.2 The Status Bar

The status bar is located at the bottom of the Trimble Geomatics Office graphics window (see Figure 2.1, page 11). It displays icons that show the current status of the project. To perform the action indicated by an icon, double-click it. Table 2.1 shows the icons that are displayed in the status bar.

Table 2.1 Icons in the status bar

Icon View Is displayed when ...

Recompute Both a recomputation is required to update the coordinates for points fixed by GPS and terrestrial observations. To perform a recomputation, double-click this icon.

Flag Survey there is a misclosure between two or more observations to the same point, or a GPS observation has failed the rejection criteria. To select all of the points and observations which are flagged, double-click this icon. The Properties window opens. You can view the points and observations. If you suppress a flag for a point or an observation, the flag is white.

Hidden Layers Plan one or more layers have their Visible property set to false. To edit the Visible property of layers, double-click this icon. The Layers dialog appears.

Locked Layers Plan one or more layers have their Locked property set to true. To edit the Locked property of layers, double-click this icon. The Layers dialog appears.

View Filters Survey one or more view filters are applied. To edit the view filters, double-click this icon. The View Filters dialog appears.

Grid Line Both grid lines are displayed. The grid interval is also shown.

Graphics Window Dimension

Both the mouse is outside of the graphics window.

14 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 39: TGO Manual Vol1

Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 2

2.4 The Survey ViewIn the Survey view, GPS and terrestrial observations are displayed as colored lines. Control points and network adjusted points also have special displays. For information about each color and the status it represents, see Setting the Color Scheme in the Graphics Window, page 148.

If the Trimble Geomatics Office software finds any problematic observations (for example, a misclosure outside the tolerance specified in the Horizontal or Vertical fields of the Recompute tab in the Project Properties dialog), error flags appear at the point where the misclosure occurs. Use the Survey view to perform survey-related tasks such as:

• checking GPS and conventional observations

• correcting erroneous data (for more information, see Chapter 9, Viewing and Editing Data)

• GPS processing (if you have the WAVE Baseline Processing module installed)

• GPS site calibration

• GPS loop closures

• inverse calculations

• Network Adjustment (if you have the Network Adjustment module installed)

For more information about these menus, menu commands, and toolbars, refer to the topic Survey View – Overview in the Help. Figure 2.3, on the following page, shows a project in the Survey view.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 15

Page 40: TGO Manual Vol1

2 Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

Fig

ure

2.3

A p

roje

ct in

the

Sur

vey

view

Terr

estr

ial

obse

rvat

ions

Pro

pert

ies

win

dow

Err

orfla

g

vect

ors

RT

K

16 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 41: TGO Manual Vol1

Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 2

2.4.1 Other Modules

With the Trimble Geomatics Office software you can install the modules discussed in the following sections.

WAVE Baseline Processing module

Table 2.2 shows the functionality that is available in the Trimble Geomatics Office – WAVE Baseline Processing module.

Table 2.2 The WAVE Baseline Processing module

Name Use

WAVE Baseline processor (available from the Survey menu or the project bar)

To process raw GPS observations, including kinematic, continuous kinematic, static/FastStatic and infill data.

WAVE processing styles To specify different processing controls for the WAVE baseline processor, and to save the control sets as named styles.

Timeline window To view and edit raw GPS measurements and survey information. Displays GPS data in a chronological view. The close integration of the Timeline window with the graphics window makes this a powerful quality control tool.

GPS Baseline Processing Report (HTML)

To display detailed information about postprocessed baseline solutions. These reports are available both during processing and also later from the Reports menu.

Process group in the project bar For quick access to commonly used baseline processing tasks.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 17

Page 42: TGO Manual Vol1

2 Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

Network Adjustment module

Table 2.3 shows the functionality that is available in the Trimble Geomatics Office – Network Adjustment module.

Table 2.3 The Network Adjustment module

Name Use

Network Adjustment (available from the Adjustment menu or the project bar).

Allowing you to fix points, load observations for Network Adjustment, determine observation outliers, and weight the observation errors.

To adjust your GPS and terrestrial networks, analyze the results, edit the network parameters, and readjust.

Network Adjustment styles To specify different adjustment controls for the Network Adjustment software, and to save the control sets as named styles.

Network Adjustment Report (HTML)

To review the results of the adjustment and perform quality control checks.

Adjustment group in project bar

For quick access to commonly-used network adjustment processing tasks.

Ellipse Controls toolbar To configure the appearance of error ellipses in the graphics window after a network adjustment.

18 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 43: TGO Manual Vol1

Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 2

2.5 The Plan ViewIn the Plan view, entities are displayed according to the style given to them, so use the Plan view to view the topographic features observed during the field survey. You can add entities—points, lines, arcs, curves, text styles, and annotations—to the project.

You can change the style of an entity by using the Properties window or the Multiple Edit dialog, or by processing feature codes. Any changes that you make do not affect the underlying survey observations.

Use the Plan view to prepare a topographic survey for export to your design software package. You can do the following:

• process feature codes

• manage layers and styles

• access the DTMLink and RoadLink software

For more information, refer to the topic Plan View – Overview in the Help. Figure 2.4, on the following page, shows a project in the Plan view.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 19

Page 44: TGO Manual Vol1

2 U

sing the Trimble G

eomatics O

ffice Softw

are

20Trim

ble Geom

atics Office U

ser Guide – V

olume 1

D toolbar

Propertieswindow

Figure 2.4 A project in the Plan view

Layers toolbar

Point style

Line style

CAAnnotation

Page 45: TGO Manual Vol1

Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 2

2.6 ToolTipsToolTips are a quick way to learn about, or recall the function of, a button, box, or tool. They also provide useful information about entities in the graphics window. To use ToolTips:

• Position the pointer over a button, box, or tool in the toolbar; or an entity (observation, point, line, arc, curve, text, or annotation) in the graphics window.

After a few seconds, a small pop-up window appears and identifies the item. This is a ToolTip.

For example, when you position the pointer over the Import tool in the standard toolbar, the following ToolTip appears:

For more information about what each tool does, refer to the Help.

2.7 Shortcut MenusShortcut menus are context-sensitive menus with commands that vary depending on where you position the pointer.

You can use shortcut menus for common tasks such as:

• accessing commonly-used menu commands and dialogs

• toggling display settings

• inserting field codes

To access a shortcut menu:

1. In the appropriate area, click the right mouse button (right-click). A shortcut menu appears.

2. Select the appropriate menu command.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 21

Page 46: TGO Manual Vol1

2 Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

2.8 PointersWhen you use a mouse, you use a pointer to select objects and choose menu commands. This pointer changes shape according to its position, the mode you are in (for example, the Select or Field fill-in modes), or the tool that has been selected. Table 2.4 shows some pointers.

2.9 Exiting the Trimble Geomatics Office SoftwareWhen you exit the Trimble Geomatics Office software, you do not need to save your project. The software saves all edits to the project as you complete them.

To exit the Trimble Geomatics Office software:

• Select File / Exit.

Table 2.4 Pointer shapes

Pointer Use

When it is in the graphics window in Select mode, or when it is to be used for selecting menu items or toolbar icons.

When it is over a text box—used for inserting text.

When it is in Field fill-in mode.

When it is in Pan mode—used for shifting the center of the zoom area in the graphics window to display a different area of the screen view.

When defining a selection set.

When moving selected entities.

22 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 47: TGO Manual Vol1

C H A P T E R

3

3 Setting up a Project

In this chapter:

Q Introduction

Q Creating a project

Q Opening an existing project

Q Changing the project properties

Q Deleting a project

Q Copying a project

Q Using project templates

Page 48: TGO Manual Vol1

3 Setting up a Project

3.1 IntroductionThe Trimble Geomatics Office software organizes your data in projects. A project usually covers one site and may contain several days’ data collected using different equipment.

When you create a project, you begin by choosing a template for it. This template provides your project with the basic general information necessary for setting it up; that is, the units, coordinate system, and display settings.

3.2 Creating a ProjectTo create a project:

1. Do one of the following:

– In the standard toolbar, click the New Project tool.

– Select File / New Project.

– In the project bar, click the New Project shortcut.

24 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 49: TGO Manual Vol1

Setting up a Project 3

The following dialog appears:

2. In the Name field, enter a name for the project.

3. In the Template list, select a template. This determines the initial state of the project. The details of the selected template are displayed in the details list. For more information, see Selecting a Template for a Project, page 36.

4. In the New group, make sure that the Project option is selected.

5. If you want the project files stored in a particular folder (other than that specified during installation), do the following:

a. Click Folder.

b. Specify the appropriate folder and then click OK.

The folder name appears in the Details list.

6. Click OK.

The project is created and the Project Properties dialog appears. The settings in this dialog are from the template selected for the project.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 25

Page 50: TGO Manual Vol1

3 Setting up a Project

3.3 Opening an Existing ProjectTo open an existing project, do one of the following:

• Select File / Open Project.

• In the standard toolbar, click the Open Project tool.

• In the Projects group of the project bar, click a project shortcut.

• In the Projects group of the project bar, click the Open Project shortcut.

The Open Project dialog that appears displays a preview of the project. The project opens in the Survey view at the size it was when you last had it open.

Note – When you open a project that was created using software that included different modules (that is, Baseline Processing and Network Adjustment), you can still view all of the survey data, such as error ellipses and processed baselines, because it stays the same. However, you cannot perform any other tasks that require these modules.

26 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 51: TGO Manual Vol1

Setting up a Project 3

3.4 Changing the Project PropertiesThe following sections show you how to use the tabs in the Project Properties dialog to change a project’s properties, if necessary.

To access this dialog:

• Select File / Project Properties.

3.4.1 Changing the Project Details

Use the Project Details tab to enter the project information that you want included in reports and plots. This tab is shown below:

When the project is created, the following takes place automatically:

• The Description field is updated with the template name. You can change the description at any time.

• The Date field is filled in from the computer system date.

All other fields are optional and you can enter values for them at any time.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 27

Page 52: TGO Manual Vol1

3 Setting up a Project

3.4.2 Selecting a Coordinate System

Use the Coordinate System tab to view the current coordinate system and, if necessary, change the coordinate system for the project. This tab is shown below:

The default coordinate system selected for the project is the coordinate system associated with the project template. For information on viewing and changing the coordinate system for a project, see Chapter 4, Using a Coordinate System.

28 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 53: TGO Manual Vol1

Setting up a Project 3

3.4.3 Selecting the Project Units and Format

Use the Units and Format tab to set the Trimble Geomatics Office software unit values for the current project. This tab is shown below:

These unit values include the units and format used for onscreen display, importing, exporting, and reporting. For information about each field in this tab, refer to the topic Project Properties dialog – Units and Format tab in the Help.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 29

Page 54: TGO Manual Vol1

3 Setting up a Project

3.4.4 Setting up a Project for Features

Use the Features tab to specify the feature and attribute settings for the Trimble Geomatics Office project. This tab is shown below:

Automatic feature code processing

To automatically process feature codes when importing a Trimble Survey Controller (*.dc) file:

1. Select the Feature code on import check box. The Browse button becomes available.

2. Click Browse and locate the feature and attribute library you want to use. You can change this field at any time.

30 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 55: TGO Manual Vol1

Setting up a Project 3

Setting up a project for attributes

If you want to set up a project for attributes:

1. Select the Use Attributes check box. The Browse button becomes available.

2. Click Browse and select a Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl) file or a Data Dictionary (*.ddf) file.

For more information, see Chapter 16, Using Attributes in the Trimble Geomatics Office Software. For more information about feature and attribute libraries, refer to the Feature and Attribute Editor Help.

3.4.5 Changing the Reporting Options

Use the Reporting tab to control how you are notified when a system-generated report has been created. This tab is shown below:

In the View generated report group, select the appropriate option.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 31

Page 56: TGO Manual Vol1

3 Setting up a Project

An example of a system-generated report is the Import report. The software creates this report when you import a Survey Controller (*.dc) file to a project. System-generated reports usually inform you of problems or errors in your data that the Trimble Geomatics Office software finds.

� Tip – You can view reports at any time. They are stored in the Reports folder in their current project folder.

3.4.6 Changing the Recomputation Settings

Use the Recompute tab to specify how the Trimble Geomatics Office software determines the calculated positions for all points in the project. This tab is shown below:

For more information, see Appendix B, Recomputation.

32 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 57: TGO Manual Vol1

Setting up a Project 3

Multiple sideshot observations

To specify how a recomputation determines the position for sideshot points observed multiple times, do one of the following:

• Select the Use best observation option if you want the recomputation to use the best observation to determine the point’s calculated position. This method is selected by default.

• Select the Calculate mean from the same type of observations option if you want the recomputation to determine the point’s calculated position by meaning the coordinates calculated from each observation to the sideshot point. The software only means observations of the same type.

Tolerance checking

The Trimble Geomatics Office software calculates a position for each observation to a point. If there are multiple observations, it uses tolerance values to determine when a misclosure is reported.

You can set tolerances for survey, mapping, and unknown quality positions. If the Tolerance checking check boxes are clear, misclosures are not reported. If the Tolerance checking check boxes are selected, the Horizontal and Vertical fields are available. Any observations outside these tolerance values are reported on error.

If the Calculate mean from the same type of observations option is selected, the software only uses coordinates that have a position less than the tolerance values from the mean.

Changing the sea level correction for terrestrial data

If you want all distance recomputations for terrestrial observations (conventional, laser rangefinder, reduced) to be performed and displayed using ellipsoid (sea level) distances:

• Select the Reduce terrestrial observations to ellipsoid (Sea Level correction) check box.

For more information, refer to the Help.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 33

Page 58: TGO Manual Vol1

3 Setting up a Project

Geoid model quality

If your project’s coordinate system uses a geoid model, the Trimble Geomatics Office software uses the Geoid model quality field to determine the quality of the elevations (for a GPS point) or heights (for a terrestrial point) derived from the geoid model.

To specify the geoid model quality:

• Select the quality of the geoid model from the list.

3.5 Deleting a ProjectYou can delete any project except the project that is currently open.

To delete projects:

1. Select File / Delete. The following dialog appears:

34 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 59: TGO Manual Vol1

Setting up a Project 3

2. Select the appropriate project and click Delete.

Note – When you delete a project, the whole project folder is removed. However, you can retrieve a deleted project from the Recycle Bin of your Microsoft Windows system.

3.6 Copying a ProjectYou can copy a project if there is no project open. To do this:

1. Select File / Copy Project. The following dialog appears:

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 35

Page 60: TGO Manual Vol1

3 Setting up a Project

2. Select the appropriate project and then click OK. The following dialog appears:

3. In the Project Title field, enter the name for the project.

4. To navigate to the folder you want to copy the project to, in the Folder field do one of the following:

– Click the Ellipsis button to locate the appropriate folder.

– Enter the path using the keyboard.

5. Click OK.

The software puts a copy of the project in the new folder.

3.7 Using Project TemplatesTo configure the initial state of a project, you must select a project template. To reduce the time required to configure new projects, create your own templates with the properties and data that are common to all of your projects.

3.7.1 Selecting a Template for a Project

When you create a new project, you must select a template. Using templates in the Trimble Geomatics Office software is similar to using template documents in Microsoft Word, or prototype drawings in AutoCAD. The Trimble Geomatics Office software templates are stored in C:\Program Files\Trimble\Trimble Geomatics Office\Template.

36 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 61: TGO Manual Vol1

Setting up a Project 3

When a project is created, the whole template—including the template folders—is copied to the new project. For example, if an ASCII file containing control points exists in the template Checkin folder, the same file is copied to the Checkin folder of the project. The template you use stays the same. That is, any edits made to the project are not made to the template.

3.7.2 Creating a Template

To create a project template:

1. Select File / New Project. The New Project dialog appears.

2. In the New group, select the Template option. Project Folder in the Details list changes to Templates Folder, as shown below:

3. Enter a name for the new template.

4. Select an existing template on which to base the new one and then click OK. The Project Properties dialog appears.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 37

Page 62: TGO Manual Vol1

3 Setting up a Project

5. Use the tabs in the Project Properties dialog to edit the default settings that the Trimble Geomatics Office software uses when creating a project based on the template. For more information on these tabs, see Changing the Project Properties, page 27.

6. Click OK. A message appears. It asks if you want to continue editing the template.

7. Do one of the following:

– To continue editing the template, click Yes. You can edit the template using parts of the Trimble Geomatics Office software other than the Project Properties dialog, for example, to enter common control points.

– To close the template, click No.

Note – You do not have to manually save a template. All changes to a template are automatically saved as they occur.

The new template appears in the Templates list when you create a new project. You can open a template in the same way that you would a project.

38 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 63: TGO Manual Vol1

C H A P T E R

4

4 Using a Coordinate System

In this chapter:

Q Introduction

Q The coordinate system database

Q Using geoid models

Q Viewing the current coordinate system details

Q Changing the coordinate system

Q Saving the current coordinate system as a site

Q Ground coordinate systems

Page 64: TGO Manual Vol1

4 Using a Coordinate System

4.1 IntroductionIn the Trimble Geomatics Office software, every project has a coordinate system. It is important to have the correct coordinate system selected for your project. If you do not, the software computes and displays incorrect coordinate values.

When you specify a template for a new project, the software applies the template coordinate system. You can change this coordinate system at any stage. However, Trimble recommends that you select your coordinate system (including the geoid model for the project) before you add points to the project. If you change the coordinate system when points are already in the project, the coordinates of the points change.

This chapter introduces the coordinate system database and shows you how to:

• use the coordinate systems and geoid models provided with the Trimble Geomatics Office software

• use a coordinate system from a Survey Controller (*.dc) file

• define your own default Transverse Mercator projection

40 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 65: TGO Manual Vol1

Using a Coordinate System 4

4.2 The Coordinate System DatabaseThe coordinate system database is stored as a file called Current.csd. Current.csd contains information about coordinate systems, zones, sites, and geoid models. When you specify the coordinate system for a project, the information comes from this database. To view the database, use the Coordinate System Manager utility.

When you want to work with the coordinate system database, use the Coordinate System Manager utility to:

• view the published coordinate system definitions

• add new parameters (ellipsoids, datum transformations, coordinate systems, sites, and geoid models)

• edit user-defined parameters

For more information about this utility, see Chapter 17, Utilities or refer to the Coordinate System Manager Help.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 41

Page 66: TGO Manual Vol1

4 Using a Coordinate System

4.3 Using Geoid ModelsPoints observed with GPS have heights based on the WGS-84 ellipsoid. These heights are known as ellipsoid heights. To obtain estimated elevations based on these heights, use a geoid model. A geoid model gives the separation between the ellipsoid and the geoid, or the mean sea level surface. By applying this separation to an elevation, you can obtain a height which then provides an elevation.

4.3.1 Geoid Grid (*.ggf) Files

Geoid models are stored as Geoid Grid (*.ggf) files. These files contain geoid-ellipsoid separations (also known as geoid separations) over a defined area. The coordinate system database already contains defined standard geoid models. Each coordinate system has a default geoid model. To use a new .ggf file, use the Coordinate System Manager utility to create a geoid model. A geoid model contains a name and a reference to a .ggf file. If you install the Grid Factory utility, you can use it to view the geoid separation in the .ggf files.

4.3.2 Using a Geoid Model to Determine the Elevation for GPS Points

When you select a geoid model, the Trimble Geomatics Office software uses the .ggf file to interpolate the geoid separation (N) at the position of each GPS point observed. It then adds the value to the observed ellipsoid height (h). This gives an approximate elevation above sea level (e) for the GPS point.

Note – For accurate elevations, observe points with known elevations and perform a GPS site calibration. For more information, see Chapter 10, GPS Site Calibration.

42 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 67: TGO Manual Vol1

Using a Coordinate System 4

Figure 4.1 shows the relationship between the geoid and the local ellipsoid.

Figure 4.1 Geoid-ellipsoid separation

If you do not use a geoid model or perform a GPS site calibration, the elevation of a point will be the same as the ellipsoid height and is not an accurate elevation.

Note – If you use a geoid model in the project coordinate system, the software uses it to convert between local ellipsoid heights and elevations for all point types, not just GPS.

4.3.3 Selecting a Geoid Model

To use a geoid model for the project coordinate system, use one of the following methods:

• Use the default geoid model defined for the project coordinate system.

• In the Coordinate System Manager utility, specify a geoid model as part of the coordinate system definition. For more information, refer to the topic Geoid Model dialog in the Coordinate System Manager Help.

N

h

e

Ellipsoid

Mean sea level

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 43

Page 68: TGO Manual Vol1

4 Using a Coordinate System

• In the Trimble Geomatics Office software, change the coordinate system for the project. Select a geoid model from the list of available models. For information, see Changing the Coordinate System, page 45.

Note – You can only select a geoid model for a coordinate system zone or the default Transverse Mercator projection. If you select a site, you cannot change the geoid model used for the site in the Trimble Geomatics Office software. To change the geoid model for a site, use the Coordinate System Manager utility to edit the site.

Selecting the geoid model quality

Use the Recompute tab of the Project Properties dialog to select the quality for the geoid model used for the project. A recomputation uses this quality to determine the quality of elevations (for a GPS point) or height (for terrestrial points) derived from the geoid model.

For information on selecting the geoid model quality, see Changing the Recomputation Settings, page 32.

4.4 Viewing the Current Coordinate System DetailsTo view the details of the selected coordinate system for a project:

1. Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog appears.

2. In the Coordinate System tab, click Details. The Coordinate System Details dialog appears.

3. Use the tabs in the Coordinate System Details dialog to view the coordinate system details.

Note – If the coordinate system does not include a GPS site calibration or adjustment transformation parameters, there are no fields in the Adjustment tab.

44 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 69: TGO Manual Vol1

Using a Coordinate System 4

4.5 Changing the Coordinate SystemYou can change the coordinate system for a project by using one of the following:

• The Coordinate System wizard from the Project Properties dialog

• A Survey Controller (*.dc) file

• Data to initialize a default Transverse Mercator projection

Trimble recommends that you select your coordinate system (including the geoid model for the project) before you add points to the project.

4.5.1 Selecting a Coordinate System from the Coordinate System wizard

The Coordinate System wizard lets you select a coordinate system for a project. You can select one of the following:

• A coordinate system and zone

• A recently-used coordinate system

• A site

• A user-defined default Transverse Mercator projection

To access the Coordinate System wizard and open the Select Coordinate System dialog:

1. Do one of the following:

– Select File / Project Properties.

– In the project bar, click the Project group, and then select the Project Properties shortcut.

– Press ���� .

The Project Properties dialog appears.

2. Select the Coordinate System tab.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 45

Page 70: TGO Manual Vol1

4 Using a Coordinate System

3. In the Coordinate System Settings group, click Change. The following dialog appears:

Note – The first time you use the coordinate system database, the Trimble Geomatics Office software bypasses the Select Coordinate System dialog and displays the Coordinate System Type dialog. This is because there are no recently-used systems to access. You must select a coordinate system for the project.

The following sections describe how to use the Coordinate System wizard to select a coordinate system.

46 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 71: TGO Manual Vol1

Using a Coordinate System 4

Selecting a coordinate system and zone

To select a coordinate system and zone from the coordinate system database:

1. In the Select Coordinate System dialog, select the New System option. For information about opening this dialog, see Selecting a Coordinate System from the Coordinate System wizard, page 45.

2. Click Next. The following dialog appears:

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 47

Page 72: TGO Manual Vol1

4 Using a Coordinate System

3. Select the Coordinate System And Zone option and then click Next. The following dialog appears:

The coordinate system group and zone entries are read from the coordinate system database.

4. Select the appropriate coordinate system group and zone.

� Tip – To view the properties of the selected coordinate system or zone, right-click to access the shortcut menu, and then select the Properties command.

48 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 73: TGO Manual Vol1

Using a Coordinate System 4

5. Click Next. The following dialog appears:

If the coordinate system has a default geoid model selected in the Trimble Coordinate System Manager utility, this geoid model is selected.

6. In the Select Geoid Model dialog, do one of the following:

– If you want to specify a different geoid model for the coordinate system, select it from the available list. For more information, see Using Geoid Models, page 42.

� Tip – To view the properties of the selected geoid model, right-click to access the shortcut menu, and then select the Properties command.

– If you do not want to use a geoid model, select the No Geoid Model option.

7. Click Finish.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 49

Page 74: TGO Manual Vol1

4 Using a Coordinate System

The coordinate system you selected is now the coordinate system for the project. The Project Properties dialog shows the system, zone, datum, and geoid model used.

8. Click OK.

Note – If you get an error message saying that the coordinate system cannot be used because the project contains null elevations, enter elevations for these points, or specify a default elevation in the Coordinate System tab of the Project Properties dialog. You can then change the coordinate system. You can select all points with null elevations by choosing Select / By Query, and selecting the Null elevations option.

Selecting a recently-used coordinate system

The Trimble Geomatics Office software records the last ten defined coordinate systems used.

To select from this list of recently-used systems:

1. Open the Select Coordinate System dialog. For information about opening this dialog, see Selecting a Coordinate System from the Coordinate System wizard, page 45.

2. Select the Recently Used System option.

3. Click the arrow buttons to scroll through the system summaries.

4. Select the coordinate system that you want to use and then click Finish.

The coordinate system you selected is now the coordinate system for the project.

50 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 75: TGO Manual Vol1

Using a Coordinate System 4

Selecting a site

A site is a set of coordinate system parameters that you name and save for use again in other projects. A site can include horizontal and vertical adjustments from a GPS site calibration. For information on creating a site calibration, see Saving the Current Coordinate System as a Site, page 58.

To select a site for the current project:

1. Open the Select Coordinate System dialog. For information about opening this dialog, see Selecting a Coordinate System from the Coordinate System wizard, page 45.

2. Select the New System option and click Next. The Select Coordinate System Type dialog appears.

3. Select the Calibrated Site option and click Next. (If there are no sites, this option is not available.)

The following dialog appears, displaying a list of the sites available from the coordinate system database:

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 51

Page 76: TGO Manual Vol1

4 Using a Coordinate System

� Tip – In the Select Calibrated Site dialog, click on a site name to view its details in the Site Details group. To view the full properties of the selected site, right-click to access the shortcut menu, and then select the Properties command.

4. Select a site and then click Finish. The Project Properties dialog appears. The site you selected is now the coordinate system for the project. It shows the system, zone, datum, and geoid model used.

5. Click OK.

Note – When you select a site from the Project Properties dialog, you cannot change the geoid model for the site. To change the geoid model for a site, you must create a new site using the Coordinate System Manager utility.

4.5.2 Selecting a Coordinate System in a Survey Controller (*.dc) File

When you import a Survey Controller (*.dc) file, the Trimble Geomatics Office software checks if the coordinate system in the file is the same as the coordinate system that is selected for the project. If they are different, the Project Coordinate System dialog appears.

Do one of the following:

• Select the Convert to the data collector definition option to use the coordinate system specified in the .dc file.

• Select the Keep the existing project definition option to use the current coordinate system in the project.

52 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 77: TGO Manual Vol1

Using a Coordinate System 4

If you select the Convert to the data collector definition option and the coordinate system in the .dc file is not Scale factor only, the project coordinate system definition changes to the one that is specified in the .dc file. All points in the project are transformed to the new coordinate system. To view the details of the coordinate system, see Viewing the Current Coordinate System Details, page 44. For the Trimble Geomatics Office software to change the coordinate system, one of the following must be true:

• All points in the database have elevations.

• The project has a default elevation specified.

If the Trimble Geomatics Office software cannot change coordinate systems, a warning message appears.

If the coordinate system in the .dc file is Scale factor only, the steps taken depend on the coordinate system that is defined for the project. For information, see page 54.

If you select the Keep the existing project definition option, all points in the .dc file are transformed to the project coordinate system.

Note – If the project coordinate system is an undefined default Transverse Mercator projection, (that is, it does not have an origin latitude and origin longitude defined) the software automatically changes the project coordinate system to the coordinate system in the .dc file. The Project Coordinate System dialog does not appear. Any existing points in the project do not change.

You can view the differences between the coordinate systems before you select the coordinate system definition to be used. Do one of the following:

• Click the appropriate Details button to view the details of either coordinate system.

• Click Summary to view a comparison report of the two coordinate systems. Use the report to inspect the full parameters of the coordinate systems and find the differences between them.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 53

Page 78: TGO Manual Vol1

4 Using a Coordinate System

4.5.3 Using a Scale Factor-Only Coordinate System

The Trimble Survey Controller software lets you select a Scale factor-only coordinate system. To use Scale factor-only .dc files in the Trimble Geomatics Office software:

1. Use arbitrary grid coordinates (for example, 10000, 10000) in your Trimble Survey Controller job.

2. Create a project in the Trimble Geomatics Office software with the default Transverse Mercator projection. For example, use the Metric or US feet project template.

3. Import the Survey Controller (*.dc) file into your project. For more information, see Chapter 7, Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software.

The Default Projection Definition dialog appears. Use the dialog to specify the false origin values for the coordinate system. The Trimble Geomatics Office software automatically enters the default projection with the scale that is defined in the .dc file. It enters the false northing and false easting of the projection using the first grid position in the imported .dc file. For more information, refer to the topic Scale factor-only Survey Controller (*.dc) Files – Overview in the Help.

Note – The Reduce terrestrial observations to ellipsoid (Sea Level correction) check box in the Recompute tab of the Project Properties dialog is clear. This is because sea level corrections are not applied in the Trimble Survey Controller software (version 7.0 or later) when you are using a Scale factor-only job.

Note – If you have a defined coordinate system in the project, when you import a .dc file with a Scale factor-only coordinate system a dialog appears stating that a Scale factor-only coordinate system is detected. The existing coordinate system will be used. Make sure that the scale factor in the project coordinate system is the same as the scale factor in the .dc file. If it is not, import the .dc file into a project with a compatible coordinate system.

54 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 79: TGO Manual Vol1

Using a Coordinate System 4

4.5.4 Using a Default Transverse Mercator Projection

The default coordinate system for a standard project template is an undefined Transverse Mercator projection. An undefined default projection does not have an origin latitude or origin longitude defined.

To use the default Transverse Mercator projection as the coordinate system for the project, select a standard template (for example, the Metric and US Feet templates) when you create the project.

When you first enter survey data to a project using an undefined default projection, the Default Projection Definition dialog appears. The dialog suggests using projection parameters suitable for the data that you are entering. Different fields in the dialog are available depending on the type of data being added to the project.

The following situations are possible:

• You import a .dc file with a GPS point to a project (with an undefined default projection) containing grid points.

• You import a scale-factor only .dc file to a project (with an undefined default projection).

• You import or key in a WGS-84 point to an empty project (with an undefined default projection).

• You key in a grid point to an empty project (with an undefined default projection).

Note – When you import a .dc file containing GPS points to a project with an undefined default projection, the project coordinate system automatically changes to the coordinate system specified in the .dc file.

To specify the projection parameters, from the Default Project Definition dialog, do one of the following:

• If a GPS or WGS-84 point is added to the database, enter the grid coordinates for the point.

• If only a grid point is added to the database, accept the false northing and false easting values, or enter new values.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 55

Page 80: TGO Manual Vol1

4 Using a Coordinate System

Using a defined default Transverse Mercator projection

If you are using an undefined default Transverse Mercator projection, you can define your own parameters for the default projection. Do this if you require a local projection and know the origin, and false northing and false easting values for the projection.

To define a Transverse Mercator projection from within a project:

1. Open the Select Coordinate System dialog. For information about opening this dialog, see Selecting a Coordinate System from the Coordinate System wizard, page 45.

2. Select the New System option and then click Next. The Select Coordinate System Type dialog appears.

3. Select the Default Projection (Transverse Mercator) option and then click Next. The following dialog appears:

56 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 81: TGO Manual Vol1

Using a Coordinate System 4

4. Complete the fields in this dialog using the information in Table 4.1.

5. Click Next. The Select Geoid Model dialog appears.

6. Do one of the following:

– Select the No Geoid Model option if you do not want to specify a geoid model. Elevations for points will be the same as the ellipsoidal heights.

– Select the appropriate geoid model from the list to specify a geoid model for the coordinate system. For more information, see Using Geoid Models, page 42. Approximate elevations will be displayed for points using the ellipsoid heights and the geoid model.

Table 4.1 Default Projection dialog details

Detail Description

Automatically calculate projection parameters

Select this check box to automatically update origin values based on the first GPS point entered in the database.

If you select this, you do not need to enter values in the Central Latitude/Longitude and false Northing/Easting fields.

Central Latitude The latitude at the origin of the projection. The false northing is assigned at the central latitude.

Central Longitude The longitude at the origin of the projection. The false easting is assigned at the central longitude.

False northing/ False easting

The northing and easting assigned at the origin (central latitude and central longitude) of the default Transverse Mercator projection.

Scale factor The scale factor at the origin. This represents the ratio of distance on the projection (grid distance) to distance on the surface of the earth (ground distance).

South azimuth system Select this check box for work in an area that uses south as the azimuth reference (south = 0°). Hawaii and South Africa use south azimuth systems.

Positive Coordinate Direction

Select the directions in which you want coordinates to increase.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 57

Page 82: TGO Manual Vol1

4 Using a Coordinate System

� Tip – To view the properties of the selected geoid model, right-click to access the shortcut menu and select Properties.

7. Click Finish. The Project Properties dialog appears. It shows the coordinate system, datum, and geoid model used.

The project now has a defined default Transverse Mercator projection.

4.6 Saving the Current Coordinate System as a SiteA site is a set of coordinate system parameters that can also include GPS site calibration (horizontal adjustment; vertical adjustment) values.

If you have applied a GPS site calibration to your project, the software stores the calibration parameters as part of the coordinate system definition. (For more information, see Viewing the Current Coordinate System Details, page 44.) If you want to create Trimble Geomatics Office projects in the same area, save the coordinate system as a site. The site is then available for future projects. This means that you do not have to perform another GPS site calibration. For more information, see Selecting a site, page 51.

Note – If you perform a network adjustment (if you have the network adjustment module installed) and compute network adjustment transformation parameters for the project, you cannot save the coordinate system as a site.

To save the current coordinate system as a site in the coordinate system database:

1. Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog appears.

2. In the Coordinate System tab, click Save as Site. The Save as Site dialog appears.

3. In the Site Name field, enter a name for the site and click OK.

58 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 83: TGO Manual Vol1

Using a Coordinate System 4

The coordinate system is saved in the coordinate system database.

You can use this site definition in future projects. It appears in the Sites tab in the Trimble Coordinate System Manager utility.

Note – Only use a site with GPS site calibration parameters for projects within the area defined by the points that are used to calculate the GPS site calibration. For more information, see Chapter 10, GPS Site Calibration.

4.7 Ground Coordinate SystemsSome regions of the globe have very high elevations, so it is usually better to use coordinates at the ground surface rather than at mean sea level. This lets you stake-out from a plan.

To use ground coordinates in the Trimble Geomatics Office software you need to:

1. Define a coordinate system for the project. For information on how to define a coordinate system for the project, see Changing the Coordinate System, page 45.

2. Enter coordinates for the project location.

3. Enter the ground scale factor or compute it using the coordinates for the project location.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 59

Page 84: TGO Manual Vol1

4 Using a Coordinate System

4.7.1 Entering Project Location Coordinates

To enter project location coordinates:

1. Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog appears.

2. Select the Coordinate System tab.

3. In the Local Site Settings group, click Change. The following dialog appears:

4. In the Project location group, enter the coordinates for the project location.

5. Set the ground scale factor. For more information, see the following section.

60 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 85: TGO Manual Vol1

Using a Coordinate System 4

4.7.2 Setting the Ground Scale Factor

To set the ground scale factor:

• In the Local site settings dialog, select the Use ground coordinates check box and do one of the following:

– Enter the ground scale factor.

– Select the Compute scale factor from project location check box. The ground scale factor will be computed from the values in the Project Location group.

Note – The Use ground coordinates check box can only be selected if a projection has been defined for the project.

For more information, refer to the topic Ground Coordinate Systems in the Help.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 61

Page 86: TGO Manual Vol1

4 Using a Coordinate System

62 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 87: TGO Manual Vol1

C H A P T E R

5

5 Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office SoftwareIn this chapter:

Q Introduction

Q Importing ASCII data files

Q Using custom ASCII formats

Q Events that may occur when importing data files

Q Import report

Q Example: Importing a PacSoft file containing control points

Page 88: TGO Manual Vol1

5 Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

5.1 IntroductionYou can import a variety of data file formats into the Trimble Geomatics Office software, as well as define your own custom ASCII formats to import. For example, you may have a data file containing control points that you want to import into the Trimble Geomatics Office software so that you can perform a GPS site calibration or network adjustment (if you have the Network Adjustment module installed).

If you have a data file containing design points that you want to stake out using the Trimble Survey Controller software, you need to import the data file into your Trimble Geomatics Office project, then transfer the points in a Survey Controller (*.dc) file to the Trimble Survey Controller software.

5.2 Importing ASCII Data FilesThis section describes how to import an ASCII file into a Trimble Geomatics Office project.

Using drag-and-drop

You can use Windows Explorer and the Microsoft Windows drag-and-drop functionality to import data files from a folder on your computer into a project. To do this:

1. Open Windows Explorer. For more information, refer to your Windows operating system documentation.

2. Locate the folder containing the file that you want to import.

64 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 89: TGO Manual Vol1

Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 5

3. Use the right mouse button to drag the file onto the Trimble Geomatics Office graphics window. The shortcut menu appears, as shown below:

4. Select the option that matches the file format that you are importing. If the file format you require does not appear in the list, then the Trimble Geomatics Office software does not recognize the file format.

To import a file of this type, do one of the following:

– Define a custom import format. For information, see Appendix A, Custom Import, Export, and Report Formats.

– Use an import filter. For more information, refer to the Help.

The software imports the file. For more information, see Events That May Occur When Importing Data Files, page 69.

� Tip – If you use the left mouse button to drag-and-drop a file, the Trimble Geomatics Office software uses the extension of the file to determine the file that you are importing. If the file extension is used for more than one import format, the software uses the default format. If you do not know what the default format is, use the right mouse button and select the correct file format.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 65

Page 90: TGO Manual Vol1

5 Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

Using the Trimble Geomatics Office software

To import a data file to a project:

1. Do one of the following:

– Select File / Import.

– Click the Import tool.

The Import dialog appears.

2. Select the CAD / ASCII or Custom tab that contains the appropriate import format, as shown below:

3. Select the file format that you want to import.

If the format does not contain coordinate system information, click Change to select the coordinate system for the file to be imported. You only need to use this option if you know that the file you want to import is in a different coordinate system than the project.

66 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 91: TGO Manual Vol1

Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 5

4. In the Quality for Import data field, select the point quality for the points in the file.

The quality that you select is assigned to both horizontal and vertical components of the points in the file. You can change the quality of the coordinate components later using the Properties window. For example, if the northings and eastings of points are of control quality, but the elevations are not of control quality, you can import the points as control quality, then use the Properties window to change the elevation qualities.

Do one of the following:

– If the file contains control points for your project, select the Control option.

– If the file contains survey quality points (for example, centimeter precision), but are not control, select the Surveying option.

– If the file contains mapping quality points (for example, meter precision), select the Mapping option.

– If you do not know the quality of the points, select the Unknown option.

For more information, see Appendix B, Recomputation.

5. Click OK. The following dialog appears:

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 67

Page 92: TGO Manual Vol1

5 Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

6. Navigate to the folder where the file you want to import is stored.

7. Select the file and click Open.

The software imports the file to the Trimble Geomatics Office project. For more information, see Events That May Occur When Importing Data Files, page 69.

5.3 Using Custom ASCII FormatsIf you have an ASCII data file in a format that is not supplied with the Trimble Geomatics Office software, you can create a custom ASCII format and use it to import the file. For more information, see Appendix A, Custom Import, Export, and Report Formats.

When you have defined a custom format that matches your file(s), you can import the file to a project using drag-and-drop, or from within the Trimble Geomatics Office software. For more information, see Importing ASCII Data Files, page 64.

� Tip – You can also add a new format by installing an external filter. External filter programs must be written as Dynamically Linked Library (*.dll) files with specific functions created. You can add them to any tab in the Import or Export dialog. When installed, they appear as a normal import or export format. For more information, refer to the topic External Filters – Overview in the Help.

68 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 93: TGO Manual Vol1

Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 5

5.4 Events That May Occur When Importing Data FilesWhen you import a file, the Trimble Geomatics Office software performs several checks on it; depending on the type of the file. Table 5.1 shows the messages that may appear during an ASCII file import.

Table 5.1 Messages or dialogs that may appear during import

Message or dialog What it means What you should do

The Project Coordinate system dialog

The coordinate system in the data file is different to the one defined for the project. This message can only appear if the data file contains coordinate system information.

Select the coordinate system that you want to use for the project. Any necessary conversions are performed before the file is imported. For more information, see Selecting a Coordinate System in a Survey Controller (*.dc) File, page 52.

The Duplicate Points dialog

The import operation has created points with the same name in the project (duplicate points)

For more information, see Managing Duplicate Points When Importing Data, page 70.

This message:

One or more messages were generated importing the file

The Trimble Geomatics Office software encountered problems importing the file.

Click Yes to view the Import Report (located in the Reports folder of the project) to examine the errors. If necessary, correct the errors and reimport the file.

The Default projection definition dialog

The project has an undefined default (Transverse Mercator) projection. Different fields will appear in the dialog depending on the data imported.

For more information, see Using a defined default Transverse Mercator projection, page 56.

This message:

Unable to import file

There was an error in importing the file which resulted in the file not being imported.

The file may be open exclusively by another application, or the file may be corrupt.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 69

Page 94: TGO Manual Vol1

5 Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

After you import the file(s), the software creates a selection set for each one.

To view selection sets:

• Choose Select / Selection Sets.

The list of selection sets in the project appears.

Note – If you import a file more than once to the same project, the file is added to the appropriate folder, with a dash and a number at the end of the file name. For example, if you import a .dxf file named MyDXFFile twice, MyDXFFile.dxf and MyDXFFile-1.dxf are stored in the Data Files folder.

5.4.1 Managing Duplicate Points When Importing Data

Points that have the same name are known as duplicate points. If duplicate points are present on import, the Trimble Geomatics Office software can manage them by:

• always merging duplicate points – this is the fastest way to import data and occurs by default

• merging duplicate points within a specified horizontal and/or vertical tolerance

• leaving duplicate points unresolved

To specify which way the software manages duplicate points:

1. Select File / Import. The Import dialog appears.

2. Click Options. The Duplicate Point Options dialog appears.

70 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 95: TGO Manual Vol1

Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 5

3. Do one of the following:

– Select the Always merge duplicate points option. No duplicate points are created.

– Select the Merge duplicate points within tolerance option and then enter the appropriate horizontal and/or vertical tolerance values. (The default tolerances are determined from the unknown quality tolerance specified in the Recompute tab of the Project Properties dialog.) Duplicate points are merged if they are within this specified tolerance.

Note – If both a horizontal and vertical tolerance are specified, for duplicate points to be merged, they must be within both the horizontal and vertical tolerance.

To specify that the software does not merge duplicate points on import, select the Merge duplicate points within tolerance option and enter 0.02 (the horizontal survey quality tolerance) and/or 0.05 (the vertical survey quality tolerance) as the tolerance values.

Note – If a tolerance is not specified (that is, in the tolerances group, the horizontal and vertical check boxes are not selected) the duplicate points will be merged.

4. Click OK.

Note – When importing digital level data, only the vertical tolerance is used.

How the software merges points

Because a point can only have one keyed-in WGS-84 coordinate and one keyed-in grid/local coordinate, the software uses the following rules to determine which coordinates are used:

1. It uses the highest quality coordinates.

2. If the existing coordinate and the imported coordinate are the same quality, it uses the office-entered coordinate.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 71

Page 96: TGO Manual Vol1

5 Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

3. If there are no office-entered coordinates, it uses the last coordinate component entered in the database.

After import, the Import report lists any unused coordinate components.

Note – If the Always merge duplicate points option overwrites a coordinate that you want to use, undo the import operation, edit the import file, and reimport the data. Alternatively, undo the import operation, specify a horizontal tolerance for merging points (see below), and reimport the data.

5.4.2 Resolving Duplicate Points in the Database

If you do not choose to merge duplicate points on import, duplicate points are created when you import one or more files that contain the same point names. For example, duplicate points are created when you import:

• a file that contains a point with the same name as an existing point in the database and they are not within tolerance

• points with the same name from different Survey Controller (*.dc) files

If the Trimble Geomatics Office software creates points with the same name in the project, you can merge the survey data from each point after the points are imported.

Note – If you have points with duplicate names that are not the same point, rename them. For more information, see Renaming Points, page 189.

� Warning – Two points with the same name but significantly different data may be the result of an error. Merging the points may produce unexpected results. If a warning flag appears on the point after merging, view the Point Derivation report. For more information, see Viewing the Point Derivation Report, page 180. When you have determined the cause of the error, disable the bad observation or coordinates, or explode the points if they are not the same point.

72 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 97: TGO Manual Vol1

Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 5

To merge the survey data from each point use the Merge duplicate points command:

1. Choose Select / Duplicate Points / By Name.

2. Do one of the following:

– Select Edit / Merge duplicate points.

– In the graphics window, right-click to access the shortcut menu, and then select Merge Duplicate Points.

All observations and keyed-in coordinates for the points are merged.

5.5 Import ReportEach time you import a file to a project, the Trimble Geomatics Office software creates an import report for the file imported. These reports are named <file name>.html, where <file name> is the name of the imported file.

An imported files report named Import.html is also created. This report lists all of the files that are imported to the project. Any files that are imported in another session are automatically added to this report.

The way that you are notified of system-generated reports is controlled by the View generated report option in the General tab of the Project Properties dialog. For more information, see Changing the Reporting Options, page 31.

The <file name>.html report includes:

• Project Details

• Messages (if any messages occurred on import)

• Recompute Report

The following sections describe each part of the Import report, and include report samples where appropriate.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 73

Page 98: TGO Manual Vol1

5 Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

5.5.1 The Project Details Section

Figure 5.1 shows the Project Details section of the Import report. This section shows the project name and coordinate system details.

Figure 5.1 Project details section of an Import report

5.5.2 The Messages Section

This section shows any messages that were generated on import. (For more information, see Messages and Dialogs That May Appear During Import, page 112). If no messages were generated, this section does not appear in the report.

5.5.3 The Recompute Report

The import report includes a link to the Recompute report which is created in the Reports folder. The Recompute report summarizes the results of the recomputation process. For more information, see Appendix B, Recomputation.

74 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 99: TGO Manual Vol1

Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 5

5.6 Example: Importing a PacSoft File Containing Control Points

To import a PacSoft file containing control points into a project:

1. Select File / Import. The Import dialog appears.

2. Select the CAD / ASCII tab, as shown below:

3. Select PacSoft format.

4. Click Change to select the coordinate system for the file to be imported. You only need to use this option if the coordinates in the file are in a different coordinate system to the project. This option is only available for some formats.

5. In the Quality for Import data field, select the point quality for the points in the file. If the file contains control points, select the Control option.

6. Click OK. The Open dialog appears.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 75

Page 100: TGO Manual Vol1

5 Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

7. Navigate to the folder where the file(s) you want to import are stored.

8. Select the file and click Open.

The file is imported into the project. For more information, see Events That May Occur When Importing Data Files, page 69. A selection set is created with the same name as the file.

You can now use the control points for a GPS site calibration or a network adjustment (if you have the Network Adjustment module installed). For more information, see Chapter 10, GPS Site Calibration or refer to the Network Adjustment User Guide.

76 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 101: TGO Manual Vol1

C H A P T E R

6

6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller SoftwareIn this chapter:

Q Introduction

Q Transferring files

Q Survey Controller (*.dc) files

Q Geoid Grid (*.ggf) files

Q Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) files

Q Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl) files

Q Data Dictionary (*.ddf) files

Q Digital Terrain Model (*.dtx) files

Q Antenna files

Q UK National Grid files

Page 102: TGO Manual Vol1

6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

6.1 IntroductionYou can transfer to the Trimble Survey Controller software any files that you need to complete field work, for example, Trimble Survey Controller (*.dc) files containing points to stake out, Geoid Grid (*.ggf) files, and Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl) files.

Table 6.1 shows the versions of the Trimble Survey Controller software that you can export each file type to.

Table 6.1 Supported file types and versions of the Trimble Survey Controller software

File description File type Version

Antenna details Antenna.ini

Antenna.dat

6.0 or later

versions earlier than 6.0

Data Dictionary .ddf 7.0 or later

Datum grid .cdg 7.0 or later

DTM points .dtx 4.0 or later

Feature and Attribute Library

.fcl 4.0 or later (without attribute definitions, including FCLIB??.DAT, where ? stands for any single character in this position)

7.0 or later (with attributes)

Geoid Grid .ggf 6.0 or later

Trimble Survey Controller .dc 1.0 or later

UK National Grid .pgf 7.5 or later

78 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 103: TGO Manual Vol1

Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software 6

6.2 Transferring FilesTo transfer files to the Trimble Survey Controller software:

1. Do one of the following:

– Select the Export tool.

– Select File / Export.

The following dialog appears:

2. In the Survey tab, select the type of file that you want to export to the Trimble Survey Controller software and click OK.

The following sections discuss each file type.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 79

Page 104: TGO Manual Vol1

6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

6.3 Survey Controller (*.dc) FilesIf you want to place points in the Trimble Survey Controller software, transfer them in a Survey Controller (*.dc) file—you will avoid the data-entry errors that can occur when entering point details directly.

Before you transfer the .dc file:

1. In the Export dialog, make sure that the Survey tab is selected. For more information, see Transferring Files, page 79.

2. Select the Survey devices option.

3. Click Options. (This button is only available for some export formats.) The following dialog appears:

4. Use this dialog to configure the format of the .dc file to be created. For more information, refer to the topic Data Collector Options dialog in the Help.

5. When you have completed your settings, click OK to return to the Export dialog.

80 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 105: TGO Manual Vol1

Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software 6

6. Click OK. The following dialog appears:

Once you have checked that the Trimble Survey Controller software is connected to the correct COM port and is in the appropriate data transfer mode, you can export the data. For more information, refer to the Trimble Survey Controller documentation.

Note – If you do not have a Survey Controller device set up, see Trimble Data Transfer, page 401.

To transfer the .dc file:

1. In the Save As dialog, select a Survey Controller device.

2. Click Open. The following dialog appears as the computer connects to the Trimble Survey Controller software:

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 81

Page 106: TGO Manual Vol1

6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

When the computer makes a connection, the Save As dialog returns. The Look in field is set to the Survey Controller device that you are connected to, and the Main Memory (C:) option appears in the list. If you have a survey data card in your data collector, the Survey Data Card (A:) option appears as well.

3. Select the Main Memory (C:) option or the Survey Data Card (A:) option (if available) and click Open. The software reads the folder that you selected, and displays all of the Trimble Survey Controller jobs in the folder, as shown below:

4. In the File name field, enter a name for the new .dc file. The default name comes from the Job name field specified in the Data Collector Options dialog from step 5, page 80.

5. Click Save to create the .dc file and transfer it to the Trimble Survey Controller software.

The Sending dialog appears. It shows the progress of the transfer. When the .dc file has transferred, you return to the graphics window.

The .dc file is now in the Trimble Survey Controller software.

Note – If you are transferring data to or from Trimble Survey Controller version 7.6 software, use the version 7.5 .dc file format.

82 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 107: TGO Manual Vol1

Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software 6

6.4 Geoid Grid (*.ggf) Files To use a geoid model as part of the coordinate system definition in the field, you must transfer a Geoid Grid (*.ggf) file to the Trimble Survey Controller software (version 6.0 or later).

Geoid Grid files are stored in the \Program Files\Common Files\Trimble\Geodata folder. They are large files—some are more than 5 MB. However, you can use the Trimble Geomatics Office software to extract a smaller geoid model from the geoid model specified in the coordinate system definition for the project.

This process (known as subgridding) reduces the size of the .ggf file that you transfer to the data collector running the Trimble Survey Controller software (version 6.0 or later).

Note – You can only subgrid from the Geoid Grid (*.ggf) file currently selected for your project. However, you can transfer any .ggf file.

6.4.1 Subgridding a Geoid Grid (*.ggf) File from an Existing Geoid Grid File

You can subgrid an existing Geoid Grid (*.ggf) file and transfer it to the data collector running the Trimble Survey Controller software (version 6.0 or later).

To subgrid the .ggf file:

1. In the Export dialog, select the Survey tab.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 83

Page 108: TGO Manual Vol1

6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

2. Select the Geoid files to Survey Controller (*.ggf) option and then click OK. The following dialog appears:

3. Select the Create a subgrid of a Geoid model for export to the Survey Controller option and click OK. The following dialog appears:

84 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 109: TGO Manual Vol1

Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software 6

The yellow box on the globe defines the area covered by the geoid model. The Geoid Grid file field specifies the .ggf file associated with the geoid model.

Note – If the geoid model covers the world, there is no yellow box.

4. To change the area of the globe in view, use the zoom tools shown in Table 6-2.

5. Use the Select tool in the Create Geoid Grid File dialog to drag a smaller box over the area inside the yellow box that you want for the .ggf file.

The File size field under the Grid properties group shows the size of the new .ggf file. The Latitude limits and Longitude limits fields show the extents of the .ggf file.

Note – The geoid model does not apply to areas defined beyond the yellow box.

6. The Survey Controller name field shows the name of the subgridded geoid model used in the Trimble Survey Controller job. If the Trimble Survey Controller software already uses a geoid model of the same name, add a prefix or suffix to the name. It must contain the name of the original geoid.

Table 6-2 Zoom tools

Tool Function

Shifts center of zoom area

Zooms in

Zooms out

Zooms to extents

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 85

Page 110: TGO Manual Vol1

6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

Note – During import of the Survey Controller (*.dc) file, the Trimble Geomatics Office software uses the Survey Controller name field to check if the name of the .ggf file used in the field matches the geoid model defined for the Trimble Geomatics Office project. If the name does not contain the original geoid model name, the software does not recognize the geoid model.

7. Click OK. The following dialog appears:

Note – The Geoid Grid (*.ggf) file stores the separation between the WGS-84 ellipsoid and the geoid for the defined area.

The default file name is the first six characters of the geoid model name. This is not the name used in the Trimble Survey Controller software. It is the name of the .ggf file that will be stored in the \Program Files\Common Files\Trimble\GeoData folder.

8. To enter a different name for the file, edit the File Name field and then click Save.

The Data Transfer Save As dialog appears.

86 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 111: TGO Manual Vol1

Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software 6

To transfer the subgridded .ggf file:

1. In the Save As dialog, select a survey controller device. If you do not have a survey controller device set up, see Trimble Data Transfer, page 401.

2. Click Open. The Connecting dialog appears. When a connection is made, the Save As dialog appears. It shows you where you can save the file.

3. Do one of the following:

– Select the Main Memory (C:) option to save the file to the main memory of the data collector running the Trimble Survey Controller software.

– If you have a survey data card inserted in the data collector running the Trimble Survey Controller software, select the Survey Data Card (A:) option.

4. Click Open. The folder of the location you selected is read. Any .ggf files in the folder are displayed.

The File name field is unavailable. It shows the survey controller name of the .ggf file that you will see in the Trimble Survey Controller software.

5. Click Save. The Sending dialog appears. It shows the progress of the file transfer.

When the file has transferred, you return to the graphics window. You can now use the .ggf file in the Trimble Survey Controller software. For more information, refer to the Trimble Survey Controller documentation.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 87

Page 112: TGO Manual Vol1

6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

6.4.2 Transferring an Existing Geoid Grid (*.ggf) File

You can transfer an existing Geoid Grid (*.ggf) file to a data collector running the Trimble Survey Controller software (version 6.0 or later).

Before you transfer the file:

1. In the Export dialog, select the Survey tab.

2. Select the Geoid files to Trimble Survey Controller (*.ggf) option and then click OK. The Export a Geoid Model dialog appears.

3. Select the Export existing Geoid model to the Survey Controller option and then click OK. The Select dialog appears.

4. Select the file that you want to transfer and then click Open. The Data Transfer Save As dialog appears.

To transfer the .ggf file:

• Follow step 1 to step 5, page 87.

Once the file has transferred, you return to the graphics window. You can now use the .ggf file in the Trimble Survey Controller software. For information about using the file in the Trimble Survey Controller software, refer to the Trimble Survey Controller documentation.

88 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 113: TGO Manual Vol1

Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software 6

6.5 Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) Files To use a datum grid in the field as part of the coordinate system definition, you must transfer it to the Trimble Survey Controller software as a Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) file. A .cdg file uses a Longitude Grid (*.dgf) file and a matching Latitude Grid (*.dgf) file. These files are stored in the \Program Files\Common Files\Trimble\Geodata folder.

The Trimble Geomatics Office software combines the Latitude and Longitude Grid files associated with the datum grid. This produces a Combined Datum Grid file that you can transfer to a data collector running the Trimble Survey Controller software (version 7.0 or later).

6.5.1 Creating a Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) File

You can create and transfer a Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) file to a data collector running the Trimble Survey Controller software (version 7.0 or later).

For you to create a Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) file, the coordinate system for the current project must use a datum grid as its datum transformation method. For more information, refer to the topic Datum Grid Datum Transformation in the Coordinate System Manager Help.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 89

Page 114: TGO Manual Vol1

6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

To create the .cdg file:

1. In the Export dialog, select the Survey tab.

2. Select the Datum grid to Trimble Survey Controller (*.cdg) option and then click OK. The following dialog appears:

3. Select the Create a Combined Datum Grid file for export to the Survey Controller option and click OK. The following dialog appears:

90 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 115: TGO Manual Vol1

Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software 6

The yellow box on the globe defines the area covered by the Latitude and Longitude Grid files. The Latitude and Longitude files used are shown in the Latitude Grid file and Longitude Grid file fields.

4. To change the area of the globe in view, use the zoom tools.

5. To decrease the size of the file, use the Select tool to drag a smaller box over the area inside the yellow box you want for the .cdg file.

The File size field under the Grid properties group shows the size of the new .cdg file that will be created. The Latitude limits and Longitude limits fields show the extents of the .cdg file that will be created.

Note – The combined datum grid model does not apply to areas defined beyond the yellow box.

6. The Survey Controller name field displays the name of the subgridded combined datum grid used in the Trimble Survey Controller job. Add a suffix or prefix to the name if the Trimble Survey Controller already uses a datum grid of the same name. The name must contain the name of the original datum grid.

Note – During import of the Survey Controller (*.dc) file, the Trimble Geomatics Office software uses the survey controller name to check if the name of the .cdg file used in the field matches the datum grid defined for the Trimble Geomatics Office project. If the name does not incorporate the original datum grid name, the datum grid will not be recognized.

7. Click OK.

Note – The Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) file created by the Trimble Geomatics Office software stores datum grid transformations for the defined area.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 91

Page 116: TGO Manual Vol1

6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

The File Name dialog appears. The default file name is the first six characters of the datum grid name. This is not the name used in the Trimble Survey Controller—it is the name of the .cdg file to be stored in the \Program Files\Common Files\Trimble\GeoData folder.

8. To enter a different name for the file, edit the File Name field and then click Save. The following dialog appears:

To transfer the .cdg file:

1. In the Open dialog, select a survey controller device. For more information, see Setting up a Trimble Survey Controller device, page 403.

2. Click Open. The Connecting dialog appears. When a connection is made, the Save As dialog appears. It shows you where you can save the file.

92 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 117: TGO Manual Vol1

Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software 6

3. Do one of the following:

– Select the Main Memory (C:) option to save the file to the main memory of the data collector running the Trimble Survey Controller software.

– If you have a survey data card in the data collector running the Trimble Survey Controller software, select the Survey Data Card (A:) option.

4. Click Open. The folder of the location you selected is read. Any .cdg files in the folder are displayed.

The File name field is unavailable. It shows the survey controller name of the .cdg file which you will see in the Trimble Survey Controller software.

5. Click Save. The Sending dialog appears. It shows the progress of the file transfer.

When the file has transferred, you return to the graphics window. You can now use the .cdg file in the Trimble Survey Controller software. For more information, refer to the Trimble Survey Controller documentation.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 93

Page 118: TGO Manual Vol1

6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

6.5.2 Transferring an Existing Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) File

You can transfer an existing Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) file to a data collector running the Trimble Survey Controller software (version 7.0 or later) at any time.

Before you transfer the file:

1. In the Export dialog, select the Survey tab.

2. Select the Datum Grid to Trimble Survey Controller (*.cdg) option and then click OK. The following dialog appears:

3. Select the Export existing Combined Datum Grid file to the Survey Controller option and then click OK. The Select dialog appears.

94 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 119: TGO Manual Vol1

Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software 6

4. Select the file that you want to transfer and then click Open. The following dialog appears:

To transfer the file:

• Follow step 1 to step 5, starting on page 92.

When the file has transferred, you return to the graphics window. You can now use the .cdg file in the Trimble Survey Controller software. For more information, refer to the Trimble Survey Controller documentation.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 95

Page 120: TGO Manual Vol1

6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

6.6 Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl) FilesTo use a Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl) file in the field, you must transfer the library to a data collector running the Trimble Survey Controller software. You can use a feature and attribute library to select feature codes for points and to store attribute definitions.

Before you transfer the library:

1. In the Export dialog, select the Survey tab.

2. Select the Feature and Attribute Library to Survey Controller (*.fcl) option.

3. Click Options. The Feature and Attribute Library Options dialog appears.

4. In the Version field, select the Trimble Survey Controller version that you are exporting to and then click OK to return to the Export dialog.

5. Click OK. The Select feature and attribute library dialog appears.

6. In the File field, do one of the following to select the library you want to export:

– Enter the path and name of the library.

– Click Browse to navigate to the library.

7. Do one of the following:

– If you want to export attribute definitions in the library, select the Export Attributes check box.

– If you do not want to export attribute definitions, clear this check box.

96 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 121: TGO Manual Vol1

Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software 6

If the Trimble Survey Controller version you selected in the Feature and Attribute Library Options dialog is version 6.5 or older, the Export Attributes check box is unavailable. This is because these versions of the Trimble Survey Controller software do not support attributes from a feature and attribute library.

8. Click OK.

The Data Transfer Save As dialog appears.

Once you have checked that the Trimble Survey Controller software is connected to the correct COM port and is in the appropriate data transfer mode, you can export the data. For more information, refer to the Trimble Survey Controller documentation.

To transfer the feature and attribute library:

1. In the Save As dialog, select a survey controller device. Make sure that it is the same version that is specified in the Feature and Attribute Library Options dialog (see step 4, page 96).

2. Click Open. The Connecting dialog appears as the computer connects to the Trimble Survey Controller software.

When a connection is established, the Save As dialog returns. The Look in field is set to the survey controller device that you are connected to, and the Main Memory (C:) option appears in the list. If you have a survey data card inserted in your data collector, the Survey Data Card (A:) option appears as well.

3. Select the Main Memory (C:) or the Survey Data Card (A:) option (if available) and then click Open. The software reads the folder you selected. All of the feature and attribute libraries in the folder appear.

4. In the File name field, the library description of the library appears. (This is the library name unless you have edited it in the Feature and Attribute Editor utility.) You cannot change the name.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 97

Page 122: TGO Manual Vol1

6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

5. Click Save to transfer the library. The Sending dialog appears. It shows the progress of the transfer.

When the feature and attribute library file has transferred, you return to the graphics window.

The Feature and Attribute Library file is now in the Trimble Survey Controller software. Any control codes defined in the feature and attribute library are also transferred. For more information, refer to the Trimble Survey Controller documentation.

6.7 Data Dictionary (*.ddf) FilesTransfer a Data Dictionary (*.ddf) file if you want to use it in the field to collect attributes. You can create .ddf files using the Data Dictionary Editor™ software. This software is available with the GPS Pathfinder® Office software. For more information, refer to the topic Data Dictionary Files – Overview in the Help.

Note – You can only transfer Data Dictionary (*.ddf) files to the Trimble Survey Controller software version 7.0 or later.

Before you transfer the .ddf file to a data collector running the Trimble Survey Controller software:

1. In the Export dialog, select the Survey tab.

2. Select the Data Dictionary to Survey Controller (*.ddf) option and then click OK. The Select dialog appears.

3. Select the .ddf file you want to transfer and then click Open.

The Data Transfer Save As dialog appears.

Once you have checked that the Trimble Survey Controller software is connected to the correct COM port and is in the appropriate data transfer mode, you can export the data. For more information, refer to the Trimble Survey Controller documentation.

98 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 123: TGO Manual Vol1

Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software 6

To transfer the .ddf file:

1. In the Save As dialog, select a survey controller device (version 7.0 or later).

2. Follow step 2 to step 5, page 97.

The .ddf file is now in the Trimble Survey Controller software. For more information, refer to the Trimble Survey Controller documentation.

6.8 Digital Terrain Model (*.dtx) FilesYou can use the DTMLink module to transfer a regular (North-South and East-West) grid of points interpolated from a Surface Model as a Digital Terrain Model (*.dtx) file for stakeout.

To create a gridded DTM file for transfer to the Trimble Survey Controller software:

1. Start the DTMLink software and select the Surface Model that you want to use to define the gridded DTM file. For more information, refer to the DTMLink User Guide.

2. In the DTMLink software, do one of the following:

– Select File / Export.

– Click the Export tool.

The Export dialog appears.

3. Select the Gridded DTM to Survey Controller option. The Grid Rectangle dialog appears.

4. To define the grid size, use one of the following methods:

– Use the Grid Size tab to define the grid by the number of colums and rows

– Use the Step Size tab to define the grid by the width and height of the grid cells

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 99

Page 124: TGO Manual Vol1

6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

5. Click OK to start transferring the gridded DTM file. The Data Transfer Save As dialog appears.

Once you have checked that the Trimble Survey Controller software is connected to the correct COM port and is in the appropriate data transfer mode, you can export the data. For more information, refer to the Trimble Survey Controller documentation.

To transfer the DTM file:

1. In the Save As dialog, select a survey controller device and click Open. The Connecting dialog appears as the computer connects to the Trimble Survey Controller software.

When a connection is established, the Save As dialog returns. The Look in field is set to the survey controller device you are connected to, and the Main Memory (C:) option appears in the list. If you have a survey data card inserted in your data collector, the Survey Data Card (A:) option appears as well.

2. Select the Main Memory (C:) or Survey Data Card (A:) option (if available) and then click Open. The folder you selected is read and any DTM files in the folder are displayed.

The File name field displays the name of the file that the DTM points will be transferred to in the Trimble Survey Controller software. The default file name is the name of the project. To enter an alternative name, edit this field.

3. To transfer the data to the Trimble Survey Controller software, click Save. The Sending dialog appears. It shows the progress of the transfer.

When the data has transferred, you return to the graphics window. The DTM file is now in the Trimble Survey Controller software. For more information, refer to the Trimble Survey Controller documentation.

Note – If you have created a Digital Terrain Model (.dtx) file from the DTMLink software, you can import it to a Trimble Geomatics Office project and transfer it to the Trimble Survey Controller software using the DTM points to file (*.dtx) option from the Export dialog.

100 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 125: TGO Manual Vol1

Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software 6

6.9 Antenna FilesYou can transfer the Antenna.ini file to a data collector running the Trimble Survey Controller software version 6.0 or later. Use this option to transfer the antennas from the Survey Controller group in the Antenna.ini file for use in the Trimble Survey Controller software. Once the file has transferred, you can only use the antennas from the Survey Controller group in the Trimble Survey Controller software.

Note – If you transfer an Antenna file to a data collector running Trimble Survey Controller software older than version 6.0, the Antenna.dat file is used.

Before you transfer the file details:

1. In the Export dialog, select the Survey tab.

2. Select the Antenna details to Survey Controller option and then click OK. The Data Transfer Save As dialog appears.

Once you have checked that the Trimble Survey Controller software is connected to the correct COM port and is in the appropriate data transfer mode, you can export the data. For more information, refer to the Trimble Survey Controller Reference Manual.

To transfer the Antenna file details:

1. In the Save As dialog, select a survey controller device and then click Open. The Connecting dialog appears as the computer connects to the Trimble Survey Controller software.

When a connection is established, the Save As dialog returns. The Look in field is set to the survey controller device you are connected to, and the Main Memory (C:) option appears in the list. If you have a survey data card inserted in your data collector, the Survey Data Card (A:) option appears as well.

2. Select the Main Memory (C:) or Survey Data Card (A:) option (if available) and then click Open. The folder you have selected is read. Antenna file appears in the File name field.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 101

Page 126: TGO Manual Vol1

6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

3. To transfer the file to the Trimble Survey Controller software, click Save. The Sending dialog appears. It shows the progress of the transfer.

When the Antenna file has been transferred, you are returned to the graphics window. The Antenna file is now in the Trimble Survey Controller software. For more information, refer to the Trimble Survey Controller documentation.

6.10UK National Grid FilesUse the standalone Trimble Data Transfer utility to transfer UK National Grid (*.pgf) files to a data collector running the Trimble Survey Controller software (version 7.5 or later).

You can transfer any of the existing .pgf files located in the \Program Files\Common files\Trimble\GeoData folder.

To transfer the .pgf file to the Trimble Survey Controller software:

1. Do one of the following:

– Click ,and then select Programs / Trimble / Trimble Utilities / Data Transfer.

– When there is no project open, select Utilities / Data Transfer.

– When there is no project open, in the project bar, click the Utilities group and then click the Data Transfer shortcut.

The Data Transfer window appears.

2. Make sure that the Trimble Survey Controller software is connected to the correct COM port and is in the appropriate data transfer mode. For more information, refer to the Trimble Survey Controller documentation.

3. In the Device field, select the survey controller device (version 7.5 or later).

102 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 127: TGO Manual Vol1

Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software 6

The Trimble Data Transfer utility connects to the selected device. When a connection is made, the cable in the icon at top right changes to show that the device is connected, and the status line under the icon at the top right reads Connected to “Survey Controller <version>”., as shown below:

4. In the Send tab, click Add. The Open dialog appears.

5. In the Files of Type field, select the UK National Grid Files (*.pgf) option.

6. Use the Look in field to change the selected drive and folder, and to select the files that you want to transfer.

7. In the Destination field, select the Main Memory (C:) or Survey Data Card (A:) option (if available) and then click Select. The Open dialog closes and the Data Transfer window returns. The files you selected appear in the Files to Send list.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 103

Page 128: TGO Manual Vol1

6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

8. Click Transfer. The Converting dialog appears as the files are converted from the device’s file format. When all files have been converted, the Sending dialog appears. It shows the progress of the transfer.

When the transfer is complete, the Transfer Completed dialog displays the results of the transfer.

The .pgf file is now in the Trimble Survey Controller software. For information about using the file in this software, refer to the Trimble Survey Controller documentation.

104 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 129: TGO Manual Vol1

C H A P T E R

7

7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office SoftwareIn this chapter:

Q Introduction

Q Importing Survey Controller (*.dc) files

Q Events that may occur when importing .dc files

Q Importing Trimble GPS data (*.dat) files

Q Events that may occur when importing .dat files

Q Importing RINEX files

Q Importing NGS Data Sheet files

Q Importing Digital Level files

Q Import report

Page 130: TGO Manual Vol1

7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

7.1 IntroductionAfter a session of field work, you import the data you have collected into a Trimble Geomatics Office project. This chapter describes how to import each type of file and how to use the Import report. It also describes the messages and dialogs that may appear when you are importing, and how the software assigns qualities to imported points.

7.2 Importing Survey Controller (*.dc) FilesSurvey Controller (*.dc) files contain data from the field work you carry out using the Trimble Survey Controller software. They can include the following:

• GPS data

• Terrestrial data

There are several ways to import .dc files into a Trimble Geomatics Office project. The following sections show you how to import files from:

• the Trimble Survey Controller software

• a computer

You can view .dc files using the DC File Editor utility. For more information, see Chapter 17, Utilities.

7.2.1 Importing .dc Files from the Trimble Survey Controller Software

The Trimble Survey Controller software stores Trimble Survey Controller jobs as .job files. When you import .job files to your computer, they become .dc files.

To import these .dc files from the Trimble Survey Controller software, you need to set up a Trimble Survey Controller device in the Trimble Data Transfer utility.

106 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 131: TGO Manual Vol1

Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

Note – If you do not have a Trimble Survey Controller device set up, see Setting Up Devices Using the Data Transfer Utility, page 402.

To import a .dc file from the Trimble Survey Controller software:

1. Do one of the following:

– Select the Import tool.

– Select File / Import.

The following dialog appears:

2. In the Survey tab, select the Survey devices option and then click OK. The Open dialog appears.

3. Select a Trimble Survey Controller device and click Open.

The Connecting dialog appears as the computer connects to the device.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 107

Page 132: TGO Manual Vol1

7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

When the connection is made, the Open dialog returns. The Look in field is set to the Trimble Survey Controller device you are connected to, and the Main Memory (C:) option appears in the list. If you have a survey data card inserted in your data collector, the Survey Data Card (A:) option appears as well.

To continue importing the .dc files to the Trimble Geomatics Office software from the Trimble Survey Controller software, using the Data Transfer utility:

1. Do one of the following:

– If the .dc file that you want to import is located in the Trimble Survey Controller software main memory, select the Main Memory (C:) option.

– If the .dc file that you want to import is located on the survey data card inserted in the data collector, select the Survey Data Card (A:) option (if available).

2. Click Open. The software reads the directory you select. It displays all of the Trimble Survey Controller jobs in the directory.

3. Select the file that you want to import. To select multiple files, press ������ . The software adds the selected file to the File Name field.

4. In the File format field, select the format of the .dc file you are importing and click Open. The Downloading dialog appears. It shows the progress of the import.

The software imports the .dc file and stores it in the Data Files\Trimble Files folder for the project. For more information, see Events That May Occur When Importing .dc Files, page 112.

Note – If a point that you want to import has the same name and coordinates as a point already in the project, the software does not import it.

108 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 133: TGO Manual Vol1

Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

7.2.2 Importing .dc Files on Your Computer

When you import .dc files to the Trimble Geomatics Office software, by default they are stored in the Data Files\Trimble Files folder for the project you are importing them to—although you can store them in any folder.

You can then import these .dc files to other Trimble Geomatics Office projects on your computer. Again, by default, the .dc files are stored in the Data Files\Trimble Files folder for the different project.

Using the drag-and-drop function to import .dc files

To import existing .dc files from a folder on your computer to a project, you can use the Windows Explorer drag-and-drop functionality.

Note – You cannot drag and drop .job or .raw files from a Survey data card to a Trimble Geomatics Office project. To import these files to a Trimble Geomatics Office project, use the Trimble Geomatics Office software. The Data Transfer utility converts the files to the correct format.

To import a .dc file to a Trimble Geomatics Office project, using drag-and-drop:

1. Open the Trimble Geomatics Office project that you want to import the .dc file to. For more information, see Opening an Existing Project, page 26.

2. Open Windows Explorer. For more information, refer to your Microsoft Windows documentation.

3. Locate the folder containing the .dc file that you want to import.

4. Use the right mouse button to drag the file onto the Trimble Geomatics Office graphics window. The shortcut menu appears.

5. Select the Survey Controller files (*.dc) option.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 109

Page 134: TGO Manual Vol1

7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

The software imports the .dc file and stores it in the \Data Files\Trimble Files folder for the project. For more information, see Events That May Occur When Importing .dc Files, page 112.

Note – If a point that you want to import has the same name and coordinates as a point already in the project, it is not imported.

� Tip – If you use the left mouse button to drag and drop a file, the Trimble Geomatics Office software uses the file extension to determine the file that you are importing. If the extension is used for more than one import format, the default format is used. If you do not know the default format, use the right mouse button and select the correct file format.

Using the Trimble Geomatics Office software to import .dc files

To import .dc files on your computer into a project, using the Trimble Geomatics Office software:

1. Select File / Import. The following dialog appears:

110 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 135: TGO Manual Vol1

Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

2. In the Survey tab, select the Survey Controller files (*.dc) option and click OK. The Open dialog appears. The Look in folder defaults to the project’s Checkin folder, as shown below:

3. Locate the .dc file that you want to import.

4. Select the .dc file and then click Open. (To select multiple files, press ������.)

The software imports the .dc file and stores it in the Data Files\Trimble Files folder for the project. For more information, see the following section.

Note – If a point that you want to import has the same name and coordinates as a point already in the project, the software does not import it.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 111

Page 136: TGO Manual Vol1

7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

7.3 Events That May Occur When Importing .dc FilesWhen you import a .dc file to the Trimble Geomatics Office software, the software performs a number of checks on the file and warns you if the file and the project coordinate system are not the same.

The following sections describe what happens when you are importing files, and what to do as a result of any messages or dialogs that may appear.

7.3.1 Messages and Dialogs That May Appear During Import

The messages and dialogs that may appear when you import a .dc file to a project are shown in Table 7.1.

Table 7.1 Messages and dialogs that may appear on import

Message What it means What you should do

The Project Coordinate System dialog appears

The coordinate system in the .dc file is different to the coordinate system for the Trimble Geomatics Office project.

Select the coordinate system that you want to use for the project. If you choose to keep the project coordinate system, the coordinates in the .dc file change to the project coordinate system. If you select the .dc file coordinate system, the project coordinate system changes. Existing points in the project change to the new system. For more information, see Selecting a Coordinate System in a Survey Controller (*.dc) File, page 52.

The following appears:

One or more messages were generated importing the file

The Trimble Geomatics Office software had problems importing the file.

Click Yes to view the Import report (located in the Reports folder of the project) and examine the errors. If necessary, correct the errors and reimport the file.

The Duplicate Points dialog appears

The import operation has created points with the same name in the project (duplicate points).

To manage duplicate points, merge or rename them.

For more information, see Managing Points with Duplicate Names, page 127.

112 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 137: TGO Manual Vol1

Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

The Default projection definition dialog

The project has an undefined default Transverse Mercator projection. Different fields appear in the dialog depending on the data imported.

For more information, see Using a Default Transverse Mercator Projection, page 55.

This message:

The Feature and Attribute file defined for this project is different

Either the library used to set up a project for attributes is different from the one referenced in the .dc file, or the project is not set up for attributes.

To import the attributes common to the .dc file and the project, click Yes. To only import the points, click No. To prevent this message appearing again, make sure that the library you use to set up a project for attributes is the same as the library you use to collect attribute information in the field. For more information, see Chapter 16, Using Attributes in the Trimble Geomatics Office Software.

The Select Geoid Model dialog

The .ggf file referenced in the .dc file does not match a geoid model in the coordinate system database. If you use the Trimble Geomatics Office software to subgrid your file, this only occurs when you delete a geoid model from the coordinate system database.

Select the geoid model that you used to create the .ggf file in the Trimble Survey Controller software. Use the Coordinate System Manager utility to add a geoid model with the same name to the coordinate system database used in the survey controller. When you add a geoid model, make sure that you reference the same .ggf file used in the field.

The Select Datum Grid dialog

The .cdg file (Trimble Survey Controller software version 7.0 or later only) does not match a datum grid in the coordinate system database.

Select the datum grid from the list. If it is not in the list, check that you have created the required datum grid in the coordinate system database using the Coordinate System Manager utility. If you have, check that the datum grid is set as the default datum transformation method for the datum transformation group.

This message:

Unable to import file

An error during import means that the software cannot import the file.

Check to see if the .dc file is open in another application (for example, the DC File Editor utility). Otherwise, the file may be corrupt.

Table 7.1 Messages and dialogs that may appear on import (Continued)

Message What it means What you should do

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 113

Page 138: TGO Manual Vol1

7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

Once the software imports the files, it performs a recomputation. The recomputation examines all observations to points and shows the best coordinates. It then creates a homogenous data set; that is, it ensures that all data is derived from points in the same coordinate system. If it finds misclosures, the software reports them in the Recompute report. Correct these before you continue. For more information, see Appendix B, Recomputation.

The software creates a selection set for each .dc file imported.

To view selection sets:

• Choose Select / Selection Sets.

The list of selection sets in the project appears.

7.3.2 Trimble Survey Controller Classes and How They Are Imported

When you create points in the Trimble Survey Controller software, the software assigns them a point class. Then, when you import points to a project, the Trimble Geomatics Office software uses this class, and the method used to determine the point’s position, to assign a quality to the point. Recomputations use this quality to determine the calculated position for the point. For more information, see Appendix B, Recomputation.

The classes assigned to points in the Trimble Survey Controller software, and how the Trimble Geomatics Office software manages them on import, are shown in Table 7.2.

114 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 139: TGO Manual Vol1

Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

Table 7.2 Trimble Survey Controller classes

Class Description What the software does on import

Control The highest quality you can assign to points in the Trimble Survey Controller software.

Imports as control coordinates for a point.

Normal Given to all measured points apart from staked points; also keyed-in points.

Imports the observations and coordinates for the point.

Stake Given to points measured during stakeout.

Imports observations and stake details for the point.

Backsight Given to points defined in the field as backsight points.

The Trimble Geomatics Office software treats backsight class as normal class.

Check Given to a check observation or a position keyed in as a duplicate point and stored as a check point.

Imports observations with enabled as check class.

Deleted Given to points overwritten or deleted in the Trimble Survey Controller software.

Does not import points into the project. The Import report lists the deleted points in the .dc file.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 115

Page 140: TGO Manual Vol1

7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

7.3.3 Qualities Assigned to Coordinates from the Trimble Survey Controller Software

You can use one of several different measurement methods to obtain GPS positions stored in the Trimble Survey Controller software, or you can key them in. The quality of the coordinates of each point depends on the method you use, or the quality you assign to the point when keying it in.

The qualities assigned to coordinates from the Trimble Survey Controller software are shown in Table 7.3.

Note – For Survey Controller (*.dc) files version 7.5 or later, if you use � to determine the position of the base, an Autonomous method is written and the software imports the position with an unknown quality. This means that all points measured from the base have an unknown quality. If you perform a GPS site calibration and are confident of the results, increase the quality of the base to survey. For .dc file versions earlier than 7.5, if you use the � key to determine the position, the base position has survey quality.

Table 7.3 Qualities assigned to coordinates

Coordinate method Quality assigned

Keyed-in control Control

Keyed-in normal Survey

L1 Code Mapping

Autonomous Unknown

GPS WAAS Mapping

Copied Quality of copied point

116 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 141: TGO Manual Vol1

Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

7.3.4 Qualities Assigned to Observations from the Trimble Survey Controller Software

When you make an observation to a point, the quality of the observed point comes from the quality of:

• the point observed from

• the observation used to derive the position of the point

The quality assigned to the observation depends on the observation method used to observe it. Table 7.4 shows the qualities assigned to observations from the Trimble Survey Controller software.

7.3.5 Managing Duplicate Points

Points that have the same name are known as duplicate points. If duplicate points are detected on import, the Trimble Geomatics Office software can manage them in the following ways. It can:

• always merge duplicate points—this is the fastest way to import data and occurs by default

• merge duplicate points within a specified horizontal or vertical tolerance, or both

• leave duplicate points unresolved

For more information about duplicate points, see Managing Duplicate Points When Importing Data, page 70, and Resolving Duplicate Points in the Database, page 72.

Table 7.4 Qualities assigned to observations

Observation method Quality assigned

Conventional Survey

Laser rangefinder Mapping

L1 Fixed Survey

L1 Float Mapping

L1 Code Mapping

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 117

Page 142: TGO Manual Vol1

7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

7.4 Importing Trimble GPS Data (*.dat) FilesA GPS Data (*.dat) file contains GPS raw data from a Trimble GPS receiver. These files can include postprocessed kinematic data and static data. GPS .dat files do not contain any coordinate system information, so you should check that the coordinate system defined for the Trimble Geomatics Office project is correct.

There are several ways to import a .dat file into a project. The following sections show you how to import .dat files into a project from:

• the Trimble Survey Controller software

• a Trimble survey-grade GPS receiver

• a computer

7.4.1 Importing .dat Files from the Trimble Survey Controller Software

When you perform a GPS postprocessed kinematic or static survey using the Trimble Survey Controller software and a Trimble GPS receiver, and store the data in the data collector running the Trimble Survey Controller software (or Survey data card if it is available in your data collector), the GPS raw data file is stored as a .raw file in the Trimble Survey Controller software.

When you transfer the data to your computer, the .raw file is converted to a .dat file. To import the data to the software, you need to import the .dc file that is created from the Trimble Survey Controller job. The converted .dat file is linked to the .dc file so that when you import the .dc file, any associated .dat files are also imported to the project.

For more information, see Importing .dc Files from the Trimble Survey Controller Software, page 106.

118 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 143: TGO Manual Vol1

Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

7.4.2 Importing .dat Files from a Trimble GPS Receiver

If you collect and store GPS data in a Trimble GPS receiver, you can use the Trimble Geomatics Office software to import the .dat file(s) from the receiver into a project.

To import .dat file(s) from a Trimble GPS receiver to the Trimble Geomatics Office software:

1. Do one of the following:

– Select File / Import.

– Select the Import tool.

The following dialog appears:

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 119

Page 144: TGO Manual Vol1

7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

2. In the Survey tab, select the Survey devices option and then click OK. The following dialog appears:

3. Select a GPS receiver device and click Open.

Note – If you do not have a Trimble GPS receiver device set up, see Setting Up Devices Using the Data Transfer Utility, page 402.

The Connecting dialog appears as the computer connects to the GPS receiver.

When the connection is finished, the Open dialog returns with the Look in field set to the GPS receiver device you are connected to. The GPS files in the receiver are displayed.

120 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 145: TGO Manual Vol1

Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

To import the .dat files into the Trimble Geomatics Office software from the GPS receiver:

1. Select the file that you want to import. (To select multiple files, press ������ .)

2. Click Open. The following dialog appears:

3. Use this dialog to check the values in the .dat file before you import it.

Note – If you select more than one .dat file, the DAT Checkin dialog displays the data for all .dat files. The Filename column shows the file that the data is from.

4. To change the value of a field, do the following:

a. In the field, enter the correct value using the keyboard.

b. To revert to the original values, click Reset.

To change the value of multiple rows in a field at one time, for example, if you find the antenna heights are incorrect for a number of points, do the following:

a. Hold down ������ and select the required Antenna height fields. (To select sequential rows, use ��� �� .)

b. Enter the correct antenna height value in the currently selected field.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 121

Page 146: TGO Manual Vol1

7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

Note – If you change a value in the DAT Checkin dialog, the value in the DAT file is not changed. However, the new value is the one used in the Trimble Geomatics Office software. Your field data stays the same.

5. Click OK.

The .dat file is imported and stored in the Data Files\Trimble Files folder for the project. For more information, see Events That May Occur When Importing .dat Files, page 125.

Note – If you import a .dat file more than once to the same project, existing occupations in the project are not selected in the DAT Checkin dialog. You cannot import the same GPS segment more than once.

7.4.3 Importing .dat Files from Your Computer

You can import any .dat files on your computer to a Trimble Geomatics Office project. When you import a .dat file from your computer to a project, the .dat file is stored in the Data Files\Trimble Files folder for the project.

Using the drag-and-drop function to import .dat files

You can use Windows Explorer to import existing .dat files from a folder on your computer to a project using the Microsoft Windows drag-and-drop functionality.

Note – You cannot drag-and-drop .job or .raw files from a Survey data card to a Trimble Geomatics Office project. To import these files to a project, use the Trimble Geomatics Office software. The software converts them to the correct format.

122 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 147: TGO Manual Vol1

Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

To import .dat files into a project, using the drag-and-drop function:

1. Open the project that you want to import the .dat file to. For more information, see Opening an Existing Project, page 26.

2. Open Windows Explorer. For more information, refer to your Microsoft Windows operating-system documentation.

3. Locate the folder containing the .dat file you want to import.

4. Use the right mouse button to drag the file onto the graphics window. The shortcut menu appears.

5. Select the GPS data files (*.dat) option. The DAT checkin dialog appears.

6. Follow step 3 to step 5, page 121.

The software imports the .dat file(s) and stores them in the Data Files\Trimble Files folder for the project. For more information, see Events That May Occur When Importing .dat Files, page 125.

Note – If you use the left mouse button to drag-and-drop a file, the extension of the file is used by the Trimble Geomatics Office software to determine the type of file that you are importing. If the file extension is used for more than one import format, the default format is used. If you are not sure what the default format is, you should use the right mouse button and select the correct file format.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 123

Page 148: TGO Manual Vol1

7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

Using the Trimble Geomatics Office software to import .dat files

To import a .dat file on a computer to a Trimble Geomatics Office project:

1. Do one of the following:

– Select File / Import.

– Select the Import tool .

The following dialog appears:

2. In the Survey tab, select the GPS data file (*.dat) option and then click OK. The Import dialog appears.

3. Locate the folder that the .dat file is in.

4. Select the file(s) and click Open. The DAT Checkin dialog appears.

5. Follow step 3 to step 5, page 121.

The software imports the .dat file(s) to your project and stores them in the Data Files\Trimble Files folder for the project.

124 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 149: TGO Manual Vol1

Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

7.5 Events That May Occur When Importing .dat FilesThe following sections describe what happens when you are importing GPS data (*.dat) files, and what to do as a result of any messages and dialogs that appear.

7.5.1 Messages and Dialogs That May Appear During Import

The messages and dialogs that may appear when a .dat file is imported to a Trimble Geomatics Office project are shown in Table 7.5.

After you import the file(s), the software creates a selection set for each one. (Unless the file is from the Trimble Survey Controller software. In this case, it creates a selection set for the .dc file, which contains the same data.)

To view selection sets:

• Choose Select / Selection Sets.

The list of selection sets in the project appears.

Table 7.5 Messages and dialogs that may appear on import

Message What it means What you should do

The Default projection definition dialog

If you use the default Transverse Mercator projection and do not define it, the software uses the first GPS point in the project to update the projection origin.

Specify the northing and easting for the origin point. The software uses this as the projection false northing and false easting. For more information, see Using a Default Transverse Mercator Projection, page 55.

This message:

Unable to Import file(s).

The software has not imported the file because of an error.

Check if the .dat file is open in another application. Otherwise, the file may be corrupt.

This message:

One or more errors were generated importing the file.

The software had problems importing the file.

Click Yes to view the Import report (located in the Reports folder of the project) to examine the errors. If necessary, correct the errors and reimport the file.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 125

Page 150: TGO Manual Vol1

7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

7.5.2 How the Trimble Geomatics Office Software Assigns Qualities to Imported Points

When you import GPS postprocessed kinematic or static data stored in the Trimble Survey Controller software to the Trimble Geomatics Office software, the software loads the .dat file together with the associated .dc file. This means that point information from the .dc file, such as the class and method used to derive the point’s position, can link with the points found in the .dat files.

The Trimble Geomatics Office software uses this class and method to determine the point’s position so that it can assign a quality to the point. A recomputation uses the quality to determine the best position for the point. For more information, see Appendix B, Recomputation.

If you collect and store the GPS data in the Trimble GPS receiver and import it into the software, there is no information on the class of the point. By default, the Trimble Geomatics Office software treats any points with unassigned classes as points with unknown point quality.

Note – An exception to this is when the .dat files are logged from the TRS for Windows or URS for Windows software. When you import a point with a user input reference position set as high in the .dat file into the Trimble Geomatics Office software, the software assigns it a control quality. The software assigns an autonomous and averaged quality point set as low in the .dat file an unknown quality.

126 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 151: TGO Manual Vol1

Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

7.5.3 Managing Points with Duplicate Names

If you import a .dat file to a Trimble Geomatics Office project and a point in the file has the same name as a point in the software, the points automatically merge.

When two or more points with the same name merge, all coordinates and observations combine into one point, but only one position is used for the point. A recomputation determines this position using the highest quality position derived from the observations or coordinates.

If the difference between any observed or keyed-in position and the final position of the point is outside the tolerance set for the project, the software reports a misclosure.

Note – When you import a .dat file containing a point with a control class specified in the .dc file into a project with an existing control point of the same name, the points are automatically merged and only one coordinate will be used for the point’s position.

If you do not want the points to merge, use the Explode Points command to create separate points. You can separate the points by data source, data type, or all observations and keyed-in coordinates. To do this:

1. Click on the merged point.

2. Select Edit / Explode Points. The following dialog appears:

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 127

Page 152: TGO Manual Vol1

7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

3. Do one of the following:

– To separate the point by data source, select the By data source option. The software creates points by separating survey data by Source type. For information on the available Source types, see Chapter 9, Viewing and Editing Data.

– To separate points by observations, select the all observations option. The software creates points from all observation and coordinate sources of the point.

– To separate points by data type, select the by data type option. If you separate points by data type, you can rename the GPS points with a suffix.

� Tip – The Explode points by data type option is used when both WGS-84 and grid points are required to perform a GPS site calibration in the Trimble Geomatics Office software.

4. To view the number of points that can be created from the selected option, select Details.

5. Click Explode.

The software creates separate points with the same name in the project.

128 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 153: TGO Manual Vol1

Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

7.6 Importing RINEX FilesReceiver INdependent EXchange (RINEX) files contain raw satellite tracking information and navigation, and meteorological data collected by a GPS receiver. They are similar in content to Trimble GPS data (*.dat) files.

The RINEX file format is an ASCII representation of data collected by GPS receivers, and is typically obtained from base stations or other manufacturer’s software. RINEX files can be transferred to a computer and imported into a Trimble Geomatics Office project. Once imported into the project, you can process the survey session and base data, using the GPS baseline processor (if you have the Baseline Processing module installed).

To use the RINEX file format, you need the following files on your computer:

To import RINEX files on your computer to the Trimble Geomatics Office software:

1. In the Import dialog, select the RINEX files (*.obs,*.??o) option. (Alternatively, use the drag-and-drop functionality.) The Open dialog appears.

2. Select the observation data file(s).

Note – If the observation and navigation files do not have the same name, you can match them in the Navigation File Matching dialog.

Importing RINEX files is similar to importing .dat files. For more information, see Importing .dat Files from Your Computer, page 122.

Table 7.6 Files necessary for RINEX file format

RINEX file File extension

Observation Data file *.obs, *.XXo

Navigation Message file *.nav, *.XXn

Meterological file (optional) *.met or *.XXm file

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 129

Page 154: TGO Manual Vol1

7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

7.7 Importing NGS Data Sheet FilesNational Geodetic Survey (NGS) Data Sheet files contain control point information for the United States and territories.

The Trimble Geomatics Office software assumes that all NGS data imported into a project is in an NAD-83 datum (that is, it is consistent with a WGS-84 datum).

� Warning – If the datum specified for the project is not equivalent to NAD-83, an error message appears. If you choose to continue with the import, the NGS coordinates are interpreted using whatever datum is defined for the project. If this datum is not equivalent to NAD-83 this interpretation is incorrect.

To import NGS data sheet files on your computer to the Trimble Geomatics Office software, do one of the following:

• In the Import dialog, select the NGS Data Sheet file (*.dat,*.dsx,*.htm,*.html,*.prl) option.

• Use the drag-and-drop functionality.

For more information on using each method, see Importing .dc Files on Your Computer, page 109.

Note – When you import an NGS Data Sheet file containing a point with the same name as an existing point in the project, the points automatically merge.

130 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 155: TGO Manual Vol1

Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

7.8 Importing Digital Level FilesLeveling observations or delta elevations often form part of the terrestrial adjustment network. You can also use them to improve the elevations derived from GPS observations. The Trimble Geomatics Office software supports the import of files from the following digital levels:

• Leica NA 2002/3000

• Zeiss DiNi 11/11T/21

Note – The software does not support Leica measurement records recorded outside of the level run; that is, 330 records.

To import Digital Level files on your computer into a project, using the Trimble Geomatics Office software:

1. Do one of the following:

– Select File / Import.

– Select the Import tool.

The following dialog appears:

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 131

Page 156: TGO Manual Vol1

7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

2. In the Survey tab, select the Digital Level files (*.dat, *.raw) option, and then click Open. The Open dialog appears. The Look in folder defaults to the project’s Checkin folder, as shown below:

3. Locate the .dat or .raw file that you want to import.

4. Select the file and click Open. (To select multiple files, press ������ .) The Digital Level Import dialog appears. For more information about this dialog, see the following section.

7.8.1 Digital Level Import Dialog

Use the Digital Level Import dialog to:

• display the data from a Digital Level file

• determine which points are used to compute delta elevations

• check the elevation of the starting point

• display misclosures

• check point names

Use the dialog to check and correct the values in the digital level file(s) before importing the observations into the Trimble Geomatics Office project.

132 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 157: TGO Manual Vol1

Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

The dialog is divided into two sections; the Elevation group and the digital level table, as shown below:

The Elevation group shows the starting point information for each level loop. It displays the following information:

• Starting point name

• Elevation – the starting point elevation can be edited from this field.

• Elevation quality

The table shows digital level data in chronological order, with each level loop section divided by a bold horizontal line. It shows the following information:

• Station point name

• Backsight

• Intermediate sight

• Foresight information

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 133

Page 158: TGO Manual Vol1

7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

• Distance

• Description

• Staked delta information – shows the difference between the design elevation and the staked elevation at a point.

7.8.2 Editing Starting Point Elevations Before Importing

In the Digital Level Import dialog, enter an elevation for starting points. The software will use this elevation to compute elevations for other points.

To edit starting point elevations:

1. Click on any point in the loop. The starting point elevation for the loop is shown in the Elevation group.

2. In the Elevation group, edit the elevation and quality and press ������� . The elevation will be computed for all station points.

Use these computed elevations to check with known values and validate data.

Note – The only elevations imported are those with the elevation symbol. All other station points will have delta elevations imported. Their elevations will be computed during a recomputation.

� Tip – Any changes that you make in the Digital Level Import dialog only affect the data that is imported; they do not affect the Digital Level (*.dat, *.raw) file.

Note – When importing digital level data, if you select the Merge Duplicate Points within Tolerance option (in the Duplicate Point Options dialog), only the vertical tolerance is used.

134 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 159: TGO Manual Vol1

Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

Selecting digital level observations

The following rules apply when selecting level observations to import into the project:

• An intermediate sight cannot be selected until the preceeding backsight is selected.

• If there is more than one sight with the same name, it will select all other observations (except for intermediate sights) with the same name.

The level data that is imported is shown in the Point Derivation report and the Recompute report.

When the Digital Level Import dialog is open, all observations are selected by default. To select or deselect level observations for import, you can do the following:

• Select or clear the check box to the left of the observation.

• Click Select by Filter. When you click this button the following dialog appears:

You can select or deselect observations using the point name or a description. To do this you can also use wildcards. For example, you can specify that only station points with a particular prefix or suffix are selected.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 135

Page 160: TGO Manual Vol1

7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

� Tip – When you collect digital level data, Trimble recommends that you store the points that you want to import into the Trimble Geomatics Office software with a unique prefix or suffix. For example, store all of the points that you wish to use as station points with the prefix, STN. This makes it easier to select points using the Select by Filter button in the Digital Level Import dialog.

7.9 Import ReportEach time you import a file to a project, the Trimble Geomatics Office software creates an Import report for the imported file. It names these reports <file name>.html, where <file name> is the name of the imported file.

It also creates an imported files report named Import.html. This report lists all of the files that are imported to the project. The software automatically adds to this report any files imported in another session.

The View generated report option (in the Reporting tab of the Project Properties dialog) controls the way that the software notifies you of system-generated reports.

The <file name>.html report includes the following parts:

• Project Details

• Messages (if any messages occurred on import)

• Recompute report

The following sections describe each part of the Import report and include report samples where appropriate.

136 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 161: TGO Manual Vol1

Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

7.9.1 The Project Details Section

Figure 7.1 shows the Project Details section. This section summarizes the project name and coordinate system details.

Figure 7.1 Project Details section of an Import report

7.9.2 The Messages Section

Figure 7.2 shows the Messages section. This section lists any messages that have occurred on import (see page 125). If no messages occur on import, this section is not displayed.

Figure 7.2 Messages section of an Import report

7.9.3 The Recompute Report

The Import report includes a link to the Recompute report which is created in the Reports folder. The Recompute report summarizes the results of the recomputation process. For more information, see Appendix B, Recomputation.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 137

Page 162: TGO Manual Vol1

7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

138 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 163: TGO Manual Vol1

C H A P T E R

8

8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting EntitiesIn this chapter:

Q Introduction

Q Using the Trimble Geomatics Office graphics window to view a project

Q Selecting entities

Page 164: TGO Manual Vol1

8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

8.1 IntroductionOnce you import field work into the Trimble Geomatics Office software, you can view it in the graphics window. You can use a variety of tools to customize the data you see in the graphics window. This helps you to check your data. When you are checking the data, you can select particular entities or groups of entities so that you can edit them or view their details. There are several different selection methods available in the software.

You can also use one of the selection methods to find specific data. For example, if your project contains some points observed with GPS using the wrong antenna height, you can easily select the incorrectly observed points for editing.

For more information on viewing and editing data, see Chapter 9, Viewing and Editing Data.

8.2 Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Graphics Window to View a Project

When you are viewing a project in the graphics window, you can use the following methods and tools to customize the information that you see on the screen.

For more information about each of the tools described, refer to the Help.

Note – You can also use the zoom navigator to view the contents of a project. For more information, see The zoom navigator, page 13.

140 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 165: TGO Manual Vol1

Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

8.2.1 Using the Zoom Tools

You can magnify, reduce, or move the data that is visible in the graphics window. Table 8.1 shows the zoom tools that control the data.

Table 8.1 Zoom tools

Tool Menu Command Function

View / Pan Shifts the center of the zoom area; changing the current screen view. If you have a mouse with a wheel, hold the wheel down to activate the Pan tool.

View / Zoom / In Magnifies the display by increasing the scale. If you have a mouse with a wheel, you can use the wheel to zoom in and out.

View / Zoom / Out Shows a greater area by decreasing the scale. If you have a mouse with a wheel, you can use the wheel to zoom in and out.

View / Zoom / Extents Changes the scale so that the window displays all of the information in the project. This option is also available from the shortcut menu.

View / Previous Returns the display to the previous zoom. If you have a mouse with a wheel, this command will return you to the previous zoom you had before last using the wheel.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 141

Page 166: TGO Manual Vol1

8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

8.2.2 Labeling Points

You can give points labels that show their particular details. These labels are of the same font and size as ToolTips, and make points in a project easier to find. They can show the values of different point fields, for example, point name and elevation.

To label points:

1. Select the points that you want to label. If you do not define a selection, the software uses all of the points in the project.

2. Select View / Point Labels. The following dialog appears:

3. Select the check boxes for the point fields that you want to display. For example, if you only want to display the names of the points, select the Name check box.

4. In the Apply to group, do one of the following:

– To label a selection, choose the Selection option.

– To label all of the points in the project, choose the Whole database option.

Note – You can only label one selection at a time.

5. Click OK.

142 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 167: TGO Manual Vol1

Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

If you close a project between working sessions, the labels settings are restored when you reopen it. However, labels are not stored in the project database, so if you want to store the information that they contain so that you can export or report it, use annotations. For more information, see Chapter 13, Adding Entities to the Project.

Note – You can create your own label options by editing the project’s Options.ini file. For more information, refer to the topic Options.ini file in the Help.

8.2.3 Using View Filters in the Survey View

A view filter is a way to only show the data that you want to see in the graphics window—all other data is hidden. As a result, you can view and edit your work in the Survey view more easily.

Note – Data that has been hidden by the view filter cannot be selected using any of the commands in the Select menu.

To apply a view filter:

1. In the Survey view, do one of the following:

– Select the View Filters tool.

– Select View / Filters.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 143

Page 168: TGO Manual Vol1

8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

The following dialog appears:

Use this dialog to hide the groups of data that you do not want to view.

2. Select the types of observations that you want to view. For example, select the Show all observations option to enable all observation types to be selected for viewing.

Note – The Show only observations marked for adjustment and Show only observations able to be adjusted options are only available if you have the Network Adjustment module installed.

The check boxes in the Types of observations to show group vary according to the option selected. The upper group displays the observation types that can be selected for viewing. The lower group displays the properties for the observation types (where applicable).

144 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 169: TGO Manual Vol1

Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

3. In the Types of observations to show group, do the following:

a. Select the check boxes from the upper group to select the observation types that you want to view.

b. Select the appropriate check boxes from the lower group to display only the observation types (selected in the upper group) with those properties. If you want to display an observation type that has more than one property, to view it you must select all relevant check boxes.

For example, if you select the RTK and Sideshot observations check boxes and clear the Check observations check box, you can view RTK sideshot observations in the graphics window, but any RTK sideshot observations that are enabled as check are not shown.

Once a filter is applied to a project, the View Filters are on icon appears in the status bar. You can double-click this icon to access the View Filters dialog and make any changes to the filters.

� Tip – When the Use Timeline to show dependent GPS baselines check box is selected, only the observations that are shown in the Timeline view are displayed in the graphics window.

View filters remain applied even after you close and reopen a project.

Note – In the Plan view, use layers to filter data. For more information, refer to the topic Layers – Overview in the Help.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 145

Page 170: TGO Manual Vol1

8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

8.2.4 Viewing Survey Data

You can change the way that survey data is displayed in the Survey view of the graphics window. To customize the survey data:

1. In the Survey view, select View / Options. The following dialog appears:

2. In the Survey Data tab, select one of the following check boxes:

– Use stub lines for sideshots – if you have a large number of observations from a single point, this option is useful for minimizing the number of observations displayed.

– Show number of observations (where > 1) – the labels show the number of observations.

146 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 171: TGO Manual Vol1

Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

8.2.5 Viewing Grid Lines

Grid lines can be used in the graphics window to show the scale of the project and to help you to easily find particular coordinate locations.

To view grid lines in the graphics window:

1. Select View / Options. The following dialog appears:

2. In the Grid Lines tab, select the Show grid lines check box. You can display:

– A fixed number of grid lines—the same number of grid lines will be displayed when you zoom in and out.

– Grid lines at the interval that you specify—the number of grid lines displayed is increased or decreased depending on whether you zoom out or in.

3. Select an appropriate line type and color from the Grid line type and Grid line color lists. You can also label the grid lines by selecting the Label grid lines check box.

� Tip – You can also display the grid lines in the graphics window using the Grid Lines tool in the toolbar.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 147

Page 172: TGO Manual Vol1

8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

Note – When grid lines are displayed in the graphics window and you select File / Plot/Print, grid lines are drawn on the plot.

8.2.6 Setting the Color Scheme in the Graphics Window

You can select the colors used to display survey data in the graphics window by setting the legend style.

To set the legend style in the graphics window:

1. Select the View / Options.The following dialog appears:

148 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 173: TGO Manual Vol1

Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

2. In the Survey Legend tab, select the color scheme from the drop-down list. Table 8.2 shows the color schemes for both legend styles.

Table 8.2 Color schemes for each legend style

Item Default legend Black legend

Default color for text Window text color in Control Panel

White

Trimble Geomatics Office graphics window

Window color in Control Panel

Black

Color of selected entities Selected items color in Control Panel

Red

More than one type of observation (for example a terrestrial and an RTK observation between two points)

Black White

RTK vectors Blue Blue

Postprocessed static baselines Orange Yellow

Conventional observations Dark green Dark green

Laser rangefinder observations Light green Light green

Reduced observations Green Green

Potential baselines (overlapping GPS data between two points)

Grey Grey

Disabled baselines Dark red Dark red

Any observation enabled as a check Dashed line in the color set for the observation type

Dashed line in the color set for the observation type

Flagged observations Red Red

RTK Continuous vectors Light blue Light blue

Postprocessed Kinematic (PPK) vectors

Blue Blue

PPK Continuous vectors Light blue Light blue

Normal point Black dot White dot

Station Blue circle White circle

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 149

Page 174: TGO Manual Vol1

8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

8.2.7 Viewing Background Maps

The Trimble Geomatics Office software can display Background Map files. You can import Drawing exchange format (.dxf), Windows bitmap (.bmp), or Tagged Image File Format (.tif) files to display. To be displayed correctly, these files must be georeferenced, using the ESRI World file format.

A World file is an ASCII text file with a .tfw or .wld extension. To be used in the Trimble Geomatics Office software, the World file must:

• use the same coordinate system as your project

• have the same units as your project

Note – The rotation in the World file is not used in the Trimble Geomatics Office software, so the rotation of files is not supported.

To select a Background Map file to display:

1. Select View / Options. The View Options dialog appears.

2. In the Background Map tab, click Add. The Add dialog appears.

3. Locate the file that you want to use as a background map and click Open. The file appears in the list in the File names list in the Background Map tab.

4. Click OK.

3D control point Blue triangle with dot White triangle with dot

Horizontal control point Blue single triangle White single triangle

Vertical control point Blue box White box

Network-adjusted point White solid circle White solid circle

Event marker Blue solid circle Blue solid circle

Table 8.2 Color schemes for each legend style (Continued)

Item Default legend Black legend

150 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 175: TGO Manual Vol1

Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

Note – Make sure that the World file is stored in the same location as the Background Map file that it relates to. You do not need to select the World file in the list.

For more information about Background Map files, refer to the Help.

8.3 Selecting EntitiesYou can select some or all of the entities in a project. To do this, use one of the following selection methods:

• The mouse

• The Select menu

Table 8.3 shows some examples of functions and the selection methods that best suit them.

The number of entities that you select appears in the status bar.

Table 8.3 Selection methods

Function Selection method

Feature code processing Choose Select / Selection Sets because the order of the selected entities is important.

Baseline processing (If you have the Baseline Processing module installed)

Select individual baselines to process.

Managing duplicate points Choose Select / Duplicate Points menu command.

Browsing point information Click on any entity or entities.

Doing a multi-edit Choose Select / Points.

Choose Select / Observations.

Choose Select / By Query.

Staked point enquiries Choose Select / Staked Points.

Calibration Choose Select / Calibration Points.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 151

Page 176: TGO Manual Vol1

8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

8.3.1 Selecting All or None

To select all entities in the Survey or Plan views, do one of the following:

• Choose Select / All.

If you select all entities in the Survey view, the Trimble Geomatics Office software only considers the points that are currently visible in the graphics window. It does not consider data that is hidden by filters. Locking a layer in the Plan view does not affect the data that you can select in the Survey view.

If you perform this action from the Plan view, the software only considers the points that are in a layer with the Visibility icon selected and the Unlocked icon selected. Filtering out an observation with a view filter does not affect the data that you can select in the Plan view.

To deselect entities, do one of the following:

• Choose Select / None.

• Click an area of the graphics window where there are no entities.

Any currently selected entities are no longer selected.

8.3.2 Selecting Entities Using the Mouse

You can use the mouse to randomly select points and observations in the Survey view; and points, lines, arcs, curves, and annotations in the Plan view.

To select entities using the mouse, use the Select pointer (click ) to:

• drag a box around the entities that you want to select

• click the entity that you want to select

152 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 177: TGO Manual Vol1

Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

You can also do the following:

• To add the entity to the current selection set, hold down ��� �� and click the entity you want to select.

• To invert the selection, hold down ������ and drag a box around the selection of entities that you want inverted.

� Tip – You can use the mouse to browse entities without continually reselecting them. Hold down the mouse button over a point for a few seconds. Keep it held down, and as you drag the mouse over entities, their properties appear in the Properties window for you to view.

8.3.3 Selecting Points

You can select points based on information about them. To do this, use the Select Points dialog. If you specify values for more than one field, the Trimble Geomatics Office software selects points that satisfy all criteria.

To select points using information about a point:

• Choose Select / Points. The following dialog appears:

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 153

Page 178: TGO Manual Vol1

8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

� Tip – If you want points to be added to any entities that you have selected before accessing this dialog, select the Add to the current selection check box. If you want to clear the current selection before applying the new selection, leave this check box clear.

Only points that are currently visible in the graphics window can be selected. If you are in the Plan view you cannot select points in a locked layer.

The following sections show you how to use the Select Points dialog to select points. Not all of the options are discussed, so for more information, refer to the Help.

Selecting points by name

To select points by name, in the Select Points dialog:

1. Select the General tab, as shown below:

2. In the With name field, enter the names for the points that you want to select and click OK.

The points matching your selection criteria are selected.

154 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 179: TGO Manual Vol1

Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

Some rules for selecting points in this way are as follows:

• Point names are not case-sensitive.

• When specifying names, you can use wildcards. For moreinformation, see Selecting Entities Using Wildcards, page 165.

• Separate names with commas. For example, to select pointsnamed 1000, 2000, and 3000, enter:

1000, 2000, 3000

• The ellipsis (...) or dash (–) selects every point with thespecified name within the range. For example, to select pointswith names including and between 1000 and 1005, enter:

1000...1005 or 1000–1005

Note – With a range including alphanumeric names, someunexpected entities may be selected since a full alphabetic sortis used. If the start and end range names are numeric, then anumeric range is selected.

• To select a point name which has a hyphen in the name, put thename between quotes. Otherwise, the software mistakes theentry for a range of points. For example, to select the pointname a-2, enter:

“a-2”.

Note – To select points by feature code, use the same rules asfor selecting points by names.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 155

Page 180: TGO Manual Vol1

8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

Selecting points by GPS quality

To select GPS points, in the Select Points dialog:

1. Select the GPS tab, as shown below:

2. Use the Horizontal precision and Vertical precision fields to select points based on the precision values for a GPS baseline.

Click the buttons next to these fields to toggle between the Less than or equal and Greater than or equal buttons. These configure how you select points.

3. Click OK.

The points matching your selection criteria are selected.

Note – The software assumes that any numbers that you enter in the Select Points dialog are in the same units set for the appropriate field in the Units and Format tab of the Project Properties dialog.

156 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 181: TGO Manual Vol1

Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

Selecting points by antenna height

To select points by antenna height, in the Select Points dialog:

1. Select the Occupation tab, as shown below:

2. In the With antenna or target height between fields, enter the range of the antenna heights for the points that you want to select.

The software treats the entered values as inclusive. To select points with a specific antenna height, enter the same antenna height value in both fields.

Note – If you only enter an antenna height in the first field, points with antenna heights greater than or equal to the height specified are selected. Entering an antenna height in the second field will select points with antenna heights less than or equal to the height specified.

3. Click OK.

The points matching your selection criteria are selected.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 157

Page 182: TGO Manual Vol1

8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

8.3.4 Selecting Observations

You can use the Select Observations dialog to select GPS observations based on information about an observation. You can only access this dialog from the Survey view. If you specify values for more than one field, the Trimble Geomatics Office software selects observations that satisfy all criteria.

To select observations using information about an observation, do one of the following:

• In the Survey view, choose Select / Observations. The following dialog appears:

� Tip – If you want to add observations to any entities that you selected before accessing this dialog, select the Add to the current selection check box. If you want to clear the current selection before applying the selection resulting from this dialog, leave this check box clear.

The Trimble Geomatics Office software only considers observations that are currently visible in the graphics window. It does not consider data that is hidden by filters.

158 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 183: TGO Manual Vol1

Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

The following sections show you how to use the Select Observations dialog. Not all of the options are discussed, so for more information about this dialog, refer to the Help.

Selecting observations from a specified point

When selecting observations from or to a specified point, the direction of the observation vector is used. To select all observations from a specified point, in the Select Observations dialog:

1. Make sure that the General tab is selected.

2. In the From point field, do one of the following:

– Enter the name of the point that the observations start from.

– To select the point that the observations start from, use field fill-in .

3. Click OK.

The observations matching your selection criteria are selected.

Note – The same rules for selecting points by name apply when specifying the point names in the From point and To point field. For more information, refer to the Help.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 159

Page 184: TGO Manual Vol1

8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

Selecting GPS observations by baseline precision

To select GPS observations by baseline precision, in the Select Observations dialog:

1. Select the GPS tab, as shown below:

2. Use the Horz prec and Vert prec fields to select observations based on the precision values for a GPS baseline. The software treats the entered values as inclusive.

Click the buttons next to these fields to toggle between the Less than and equal and Greater than and equal buttons. These configure how you select the points.

3. Click OK.

The observations matching your selection criteria are selected.

Note – You can use the Ratio, Ref variance, and RMS fields if you have the Baseline Processing module installed and you have processed baselines.

160 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 185: TGO Manual Vol1

Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

8.3.5 Selecting Duplicate Points

The Trimble Geomatics Office software provides a quick way to select duplicate points in the database. In both views, you can select duplicate points based on the following point fields:

• Coordinates

• Name

• Name and positions within a specified distance

To select duplicate points, do one of the following:

• Choose Select / Duplicate Points and select the option that you want from the list.

• Choose Select / By Query and select the option that you want from the list.

� Tip – Use the above selection methods if you want to merge duplicate points with the same name. For more information on merging points, see Managing Duplicate Points, page 117, or refer to the Help.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 161

Page 186: TGO Manual Vol1

8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

8.3.6 Selecting Staked Points

You can quickly select staked points in your project, based on a series of queries. This function is available in both views.

To select staked points:

1. Choose Select / Staked Points, the following dialog appears:

2. Select the appropriate query from the list. (If you select a query that is followed by an ellipsis, you will be asked to specify parameter values.)

3. If necessary, use options in the Selection group to create specific selections. You can also use these options when creating your own Stakeout report.

For more information, see Selecting Entities Using Queries, page 166.

162 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 187: TGO Manual Vol1

Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

8.3.7 Selecting Calibration Points

You can select the calibration points that appear in the Point list of the GPS Site Calibration dialog.

To select calibration points:

• Choose Select / Calibration Points.

All of the calibration points that appear in the GPS Site Calibration dialog will be selected in your project.

Note – If there are no points in the Point list, this option is unavailable.

8.3.8 Selecting Entities in the Plan View

In the Plan view, you can also use the Select menu to select entities based on the following Plan view properties:

• Layers

• Styles

• Point features

For more information about each selection command, refer to the Help.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 163

Page 188: TGO Manual Vol1

8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

Selecting entities by layer

You can select all entities in specified layers. This lets you use the Multiple Edit dialog to change a common field for all entities in the layer, or move entities from one layer to another.

To select all entities in a layer:

1. In the Plan view, choose Select / By Layer. The following dialog appears:

2. Select the check boxes for the layers that you want to select and then click OK.

3. The entities in the chosen layers are selected in the graphics window.

Note – If a layer has its Locked property selected, or its Visible property not selected, in the Layers dialog, the layer is not available in the Select by Layers dialog. For information about the Layers dialog, see Layers, page 322.

164 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 189: TGO Manual Vol1

Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

8.3.9 Selecting Entities Using Wildcards

When using the Select Points dialog or the Select Observations dialog, you can use wildcards to select multiple point names. Table 8.4 shows the wildcards that are available and how they work.

You can use multiple wildcards. For example, 1?0*0 matches 1500, 1A0250, or 15020.

Table 8.5 shows you how to use different wildcard characters to select ranges of points or observations.

Table 8.4 Wildcards for selecting entities

Wildcard Description

? Stands for any single character in the same position as the question mark. For example, Tree? matches Tree1 or TreeA. Another example, 1?00 matches 1000, 1100, 1200, and so forth.

* Stands for any number of characters in the same position as the asterisk. For example, Tree* matches Tree, Tree1, or Tree007.

# Stands for any digit in the same position as the number sign. For example, Tree# matches Tree1 or Tree2. Another example, Tree### matches Tree100, Tree101, or Tree200.

Table 8.5 How to use wildcards for selecting entities

Type of match Pattern Match No match

Multiple characters a*a

*ab

ab*

aa, aBa, aBBBa

Xab, BBab

abX, abcdefg

aBC, aabb

aZb, abc

acb, cab

Special character a[*]a a*a aba

Single character a?a aaa, a3a, aBa aBBa

Single digit a#a a0a, a1a, a2a aaa, a10a

Range of characters [a–z] f, p, j 2, &

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 165

Page 190: TGO Manual Vol1

8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

Note – The point name 10 is considered to fall between 1 and a. It will not fall in the range 1 to 9 because both names are numeric. Similarly, ab sorts between a and b.

Use double quotes to prevent pattern matching in names that contain wild card characters. For example, "TRS#1...TRS#8" selects the range of points with explicit names between TRS#1 and TRS#8.

8.3.10 Selecting Entities Using Queries

A query retrieves data from multiple fields in one or more tables in the database, based on the criteria specified.

You can use queries to select entities. The same queries are available in both the Survey and Plan views.

Outside a range [!a–z] 9, &, % b, d

Not a digit [!0–9] A, a, &, ~ 0, 1, 9

Combined a[!b–m]# An9, az0, a99 abc, aj0

Table 8.5 How to use wildcards for selecting entities (Continued)

Type of match Pattern Match No match

166 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 191: TGO Manual Vol1

Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

To access these queries:

• Choose Select / By Query. The following dialog appears:

If a query has an ellipsis at the end of the name, you must enter one or more parameters to complete the query. For example, if you select the Points by description... query, a dialog appears. You must enter the point’s description field.

If necessary, use the following options in the Selection group to create specific selections:

– New – creates a new selection set

– Add to current – adds the selection set that you create to the current selection set

– Refine current – using the current selection set, the software finds points that are common with the selection set you are about to create

For example, you may have a project in which you want to find all unprocessed baselines that were observed using a GPS receiver with serial number 1234. To do this:

1. Use the query to select all unprocessed baselines.

2. Use the query again to select the Baselines using receiver… option.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 167

Page 192: TGO Manual Vol1

8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

3. In the Selection group, select the Refine current option.

4. In the Select by Query - Parameters dialog that appears, enter 1234.

All unprocessed baselines that were observed with receiver 1234 will be selected.

For more information about select queries, refer to the Help.

Note – You can create your own database queries using the Microsoft Access software. For information, refer to the topic Database Queries – Overview in the Help.

8.3.11 Using Selection Sets

A selection set is anything that you currently have selected in the Trimble Geomatics Office software. You can save your current selection set at any time and retrieve it later. These saved selection sets maintain the order of their entities. If you delete entities that are part of the selection set, the selection set still works with the remaining entities.

Saving the current selection set

To save the current selection set:

1. Choose Select / Selection Sets / Save. The following dialog appears:

2. In the Name field, enter a unique name for the set and then click OK.

The selection set is saved.

168 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 193: TGO Manual Vol1

Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

Note – When you import a data file, the software automatically creates a selection set for you. This selection set has the same name as the file you imported.

Retrieving a saved selection set

You can retrieve a saved selection set at any time—this is useful for reporting on points or for quickly retrieving control points to be used in a GPS site calibration.

To retrieve a saved selection set:

1. Choose Select / Selection Sets / Retrieve. The following dialog appears:

Each item in the Selection sets list is either a data file you have imported or a saved selection set.

2. Select the check boxes for the selection sets you want to retrieve and then click OK.

The entities in the selection set(s) chosen are selected.

� Tip – You can use the Show only data in the selection set option in the View Filters dialog to display data that you have saved in a selection set.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 169

Page 194: TGO Manual Vol1

8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

To access a list of the ten most recently-used selection sets:

1. Choose Select / Selection Sets.

This list appears in the menu, as shown below:

2. Choose the selection set that you require.

170 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 195: TGO Manual Vol1

C H A P T E R

9

9 Viewing and Editing Data

In this chapter:

Q Introduction

Q Properties window overview

Q Viewing survey data in the Properties window

Q Viewing and editing points

Q Viewing observations

Q Viewing erroneous data

Q Editing survey data

Q Editing multiple entities at one time

Q Using the data analysis tools

Q Viewing note records

Q Viewing CAD entities

Page 196: TGO Manual Vol1

9 Viewing and Editing Data

9.1 IntroductionAt various stages in a project you need to verify your data before proceeding with the next task. This chapter shows you how to use the Properties window to:

• view and edit details for points and other observation types

• check erroneous data

• view and edit CAD entities

It also shows ways to correct your survey data and use data analysis tools.

9.2 Properties Window OverviewThe Properties window lets you view the details of all entities (points, observations, lines, arcs, curves, text, annotations). Use it whenever you want to view and edit entity details. The software immediately applies any changes that you make to entities in the Properties window.

You can keep the Properties window open while you use other parts of the Trimble Geomatics Office software. The Properties window is automatically updated to show the correct information about the currently selected entities.

The tree view in the Properties window shows the names and values of the selected item, and the relationship between the entities. For example, to view the from and to points for any observation or linetype entity, click the plus (+) icon and select the point that you want to view and edit.

172 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 197: TGO Manual Vol1

Viewing and Editing Data 9

You can select one or more entities to view in the Properties window at the same time. When you have defined a current selection set and selected an entity to view from the Properties window selection list, the current selection in the graphics window is updated to include only the entity that you are viewing. The Properties window selection list retains the original selection set. Any entities highlighted in the Properties window selection list become the current selection set in the graphics window.

To open the Properties window, do one of the following:

• Select Edit / Properties.

• In the standard toolbar, select the Edit Properties tool.

• Double-click a graphical entity.

Figure 9.1 shows the Properties window, and the table following it describes each part.

Figure 9.1 The Properties window

1 2

3

4

5

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 173

Page 198: TGO Manual Vol1

9 Viewing and Editing Data

The information and tabs available on the right side of the Properties window depend on the entity type currently selected. The following sections describe how to use the Properties window to view and edit data for each type.

Part Function

1 Shows the number of items selected.

2 The tabs organize data into groups. The availability of the tabs depends on the type of entity selected.

3 Lists the entities in your current selection set. You can only view the details of one entity at a time. If you have more than one entity selected, from the list select the entity you want to look at.

4 Lets you expand and collapse the tree view outline.

5 Selection tools:

The Group Survey Data tool groups data by source or type.

The Sort tool sorts the selected entities. To do this, select the option you want.

The Filter tool only keeps an entity type in the current selection set.

174 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 199: TGO Manual Vol1

Viewing and Editing Data 9

9.3 Viewing Survey Data in the Properties windowUse the Survey tab of the Properties window to view and edit the survey-related properties of an entity in the selection. You can view the properties of entities that appear in the Survey view such as:

• Points

• GPS observations

• Conventional observations

• Level observations

• Laser rangefinder observations

• Azimuth observations

• Reduced observations

• Staked-out point information

• Events data

9.3.1 Using Pages to View Survey Details

Survey details in the Properties window are organized into pages. You can only view one page at a time. Access the pages using the available page buttons. They depend on the entity type that is currently selected.

Figure 9.2 shows the typical parts of a page in the Survey tab.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 175

Page 200: TGO Manual Vol1

9 Viewing and Editing Data

Figure 9.2 The Survey tab

9.4 Viewing and Editing PointsPoint details in the Properties window are organized into the following tabs:

• Use the Survey tab to view and edit the survey-related details of a selected point.

• Use the Stakeout tab to view details about staked out points.

• Use the CAD tab to view and edit the CAD-related details of a selected point.

• If a selected point contains attribute information and you have set up the project for attributes, use the Attributes tab to view this information.

To view and edit the details of a point, select the appropriate tab in the Properties window.

Page buttons

Page name

176 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 201: TGO Manual Vol1

Viewing and Editing Data 9

The following sections describe the details of a point that you can view, using the Properties window.

9.4.1 Viewing Survey Details

Use the Survey tab in the Properties window to view and edit the survey-related details of the selected point (for example, the derived position, warning messages, occupation and setup details, coordinates, and observation statistics).

To view the survey details for a point:

1. In the Properties window, do one of the following:

– From the Properties window selection list, select a point.

– In the graphics window, select a point.

2. Select the Survey tab.

To select the types of survey details that you want to view, click a page button.

� Tip – To view the from and to points for any observation, click the plus (+) icon beside the observation. Then, click the point that you want to view and edit.

The following Properties window shows a typical page for a point:

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 177

Page 202: TGO Manual Vol1

9 Viewing and Editing Data

Table 9.1 summarizes the pages for points in the Properties window. For more information on each page, refer to the appropriate Help topics.

Table 9.1 Pages for points in the Properties window

Button Page name What it shows

Summary The point name, the derived position, and qualities for a point.

Use this page to view the qualities of the position components or report on how the point was derived.

Warning A warning message indicating that a misclosure has been detected on the point, or that a high RMS was detected.

Use this page to view the error message and to suppress the warning flags displayed in the graphics window if the error is acceptable for the project.

Occupations and Setups

Details of any GPS occupation or terrestrial setup from or to the point.

Use this page to view and correct the details for the GPS occupation or terrestrial setup details, for example, antenna and target heights. If there is more than one occupation or setup for the point, a shortcut menu appears. As you hold the pointer over different occupations and setups in the shortcut menu, the occupation and setup details are updated in the page.

Error Estimate The estimated errors for the point’s position after a network adjustment, if you have the Network Adjustment module installed.

N/A Coordinate The underlying coordinates and qualities for a point.

Use this page to change the coordinate qualities and status of the point.

For more information on using this page, see Changing the status of coordinates, page 184.

N/A GPS Solution (APC)

The position solution of a GPS point including the time of occupation, WGS-84 coordinates, and precisions.

Use this page to view the position solution and to change the status of the point.

178 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 203: TGO Manual Vol1

Viewing and Editing Data 9

Note – If the Summary page is set to display the point as a WGS-84 position, the fields displayed will depend on what is set for the Display WGS-84 as setting in the Units and Format tab of the Project Properties dialog. For example, if the Display WGS-84 as field is set to X,Y,Z, the WGS-84 fields in the Summary page are labeled X,Y,Z. If the Display WGS-84 as field is set to L,L,H, the WGS-84 fields are labeled Latitude, Longitude, and Height.

9.4.2 Point Quality Indicators

The Properties window shows the quality of each coordinate component. Table 9.2 describes these qualities.

Table 9.2 Point quality indicators

Symbol Quality

Fixed Control (yellow)

Adjusted

Control (blue)

Survey

Mapping

Unknown

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 179

Page 204: TGO Manual Vol1

9 Viewing and Editing Data

� Tip – The geoid indicator is used in the Properties window to show if the elevation or height was derived from a geoid. For example, if an RTK point is measured, it will have a height on WGS-84 and an elevation derived from the geoid. Conversely, if a terrestrial point is collected, it will have an elevation and a WGS-84 height derived from the geoid. These indicators are also used in the Point Derivation report and the Recompute report.

9.4.3 Viewing the Point Derivation Report

The Point Derivation report shows how a recomputation determined the calculated position for a point. To generate this report for any point, in the Properties window:

1. Select the point that you want to view.

2. To open the Summary page, click the Summary button.

3. Select the Show derivation report tool.

4. An HTML report is generated and displayed on the default HTML viewer on your computer.

When a Point Derivation report is generated, it is stored in the Reports folder. The existing Point Derivation report is overwritten.

The format of the report is the same as the Point Derivations section of the Recompute report. For information on the content of the report, see The Point Derivations Section, page 516.

180 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 205: TGO Manual Vol1

Viewing and Editing Data 9

Figure 9.3 and Figure 9.4 show parts of the Point Derivation report.

Figure 9.3 The Point Derivations section

Figure 9.4 The Survey Data section

Note – Before you can view a Point Derivation report, you must have performed a recomputation since opening the project.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 181

Page 206: TGO Manual Vol1

9 Viewing and Editing Data

9.4.4 Entering Coordinates for a Point

You can enter control coordinates for a point into the Trimble Geomatics Office software by:

• importing a Trimble Survey Controller job with keyed-in control coordinates entered in the field. For more information, refer to the Trimble Survey Controller documentation.

• importing an ASCII file with control points. For more information, see Chapter 5, Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software.

• entering known coordinates for an existing point using the Properties window or the Points dialog (if you have the Network Adjustment module installed). For information on using the Points dialog, refer to the Network Adjustment module Help.

• entering known coordinates for a new point using the Insert Points dialog. For more information, see Adding Points, page 338.

Any coordinates entered receive an office-entered coordinate source. This is shown in the Properties window.

Note – Each point in the Trimble Geomatics Office software can only have one keyed-in WGS-84 coordinate and one keyed-in grid/local coordinate.

The following section describes how to use the Properties window to enter known coordinates for an existing point.

Using the Properties window to enter coordinates for a point

You can key in coordinates for a point using the Properties window. However, only do this when you want the software to use your keyed-in coordinate in preference to the coordinates derived from observations. The keyed-in coordinate will have an office-entered source.

182 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 207: TGO Manual Vol1

Viewing and Editing Data 9

To key in coordinates using the Properties window:

1. Select the point that you want to add coordinates for.

2. To open the Properties window, select the Edit Properties tool.

3. To open the Summary page, click the Summary page button.

4. Select the Add coordinate tool.

Select the coordinate type to be added from the drop-down list (WGS-84, Grid or Local). You can only enter one grid/local and one WGS-84 coordinate for each point, so if a WGS-84 coordinate already exists, then you cannot add another.

5. A keyed-in coordinate appears in the point tree, as shown below:

6. In the coordinate fields, enter the known coordinates.

When you add a new coordinate, all of the fields are null (?). Use the Insert Current Value tool to enter the current point position and quality. You must select each field before the Add current value field is available.

7. To set the quality for the point, select the Quality Selector Control tool and the coordinate(s) that you want to change. Select the quality from the list.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 183

Page 208: TGO Manual Vol1

9 Viewing and Editing Data

8. Use the Coordinate Type option to store the data in the database in the format specified. The software saves the coordinate in the coordinate view selected.

Note – You can only edit the coordinates in the display format that is stored in the database.

Note – If you have a keyed-in grid coordinate and a keyed-in WGS-84 coordinate, you cannot save the keyed-in grid coordinate as a WGS-84 coordinate.

Changing the status of coordinates

To change the status of an underlying coordinate using the Properties window, in a Coordinate page:

1. In the Status field, select the appropriate option. Do one of the following:

– If you want the coordinate used to derive the position of the point, select Enabled.

– If you do not want the coordinate used to derive the position of the point, select Disabled.

– If you only want the coordinate used if there are no other enabled observations or coordinates that can be used to derive the position of the point, select Enabled as check.

2. Click OK.

The software performs a recomputation, and you can view the new derived position for the point in the Summary page of the Properties window.

Note – The Recompute report reports on coordinates enabled as check, but not on disabled coordinates.

184 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 209: TGO Manual Vol1

Viewing and Editing Data 9

You can also view the source information from which the survey data is derived. This information is shown in any of the pages (except the Summary page) of the Survey tab for a coordinate or observation. Table 9.3 shows some common source types that may appear in the Properties window.

Table 9.3 Common source types of survey data

Source type What it contains

Imported file All survey data contained from an imported file source, such as observations, GPS occupations, keyed-in coordinates, conventional instrument/target setups, level, and azimuth observations. The Source type heading displays the file format and the file name. For example, .dc file (RTK___co.dc).

Keyed-in Coordinate The position of the point determined by entering coordinates into the software.

Elevation adjustment The position of a point determined after applying an elevation adjustment.

Coordinate transformation The position determined by moving a point or after applying a horizontal coordinate transformation.

Baseline Processor (If you have the Baseline Processing module installed)

The observation solution determined after processing the baseline with the WAVE Baseline Processor.

Adjustment (If you have the Network Adjustment module installed)

The position of the point that has been determined after a network adjustment.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 185

Page 210: TGO Manual Vol1

9 Viewing and Editing Data

9.4.5 Viewing Stakeout Information for a Point

Use the Stakeout tab of the Properties window to view information about staked out points. You can view the information related to the following:

• As-staked deltas

• Linear details

• Catch points

• Story boards

• Digital Terrain Models

To view the stakeout information for a point:

1. In the Properties window, do one of the following:

– From the Properties window selection list, select a point.

– In the graphics window, select a point.

2. Select the Stakeout tab.

To select the types of stakeout information that you want to view, click a page button. The following Properties window shows a typical page selected for a point:

186 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 211: TGO Manual Vol1

Viewing and Editing Data 9

Table 9.4 summarizes the pages for stakeout in the Properties window. For more information on each page, refer to the appropriate Help topic.

For more information about the Stakeout tab, refer to the Properties Window – Stakeout tab – Overview topic in the Help.

Table 9.4 Pages for stakeout in the Properties window

Button Page name What it shows

As Staked Deltas The differences between the location of the design point and the staked out point.

Linear Details The stakeout details from linear features. For example, a line, curve, or road.

Catch Point Design The point where a design surface intersects the natural surface is known as the catch point. This page shows details about the catch point and is only available when a point is staked out from a catch point on a road.

Story Board The distances from the catch point to points on the template.

DTM Details about staked DTM points. For example, DTM name, vertical offset, and cut/fill information.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 187

Page 212: TGO Manual Vol1

9 Viewing and Editing Data

9.4.6 Viewing CAD Details

Use the CAD tab in the Properties window to view and edit the CAD-related information of the selected point (for example, CAD style, layer, feature code value, and description).

To view the CAD-related details of a point:

1. In the Properties window, do one of the following:

– From the Properties window selection list, select a point.

– In the graphics window, select a point.

2. Select the CAD tab. The following Properties window shows the CAD-related details of a selected point.

3. To edit the details, enter values in the appropriate fields or select an option from the list.

If a layer or point style has not been specified for a point, the software uses the default settings.

� Tip – To view any CAD entities assigned to the point (for example, lines, curves, arcs, and annotations), click the plus (+) icon beside the point. Then, click the entity that you want to view.

188 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 213: TGO Manual Vol1

Viewing and Editing Data 9

9.4.7 Attributes

Use the Attributes tab in the Properties window to manage the attributes for a selected point (for example, you can view, edit, add, and delete attributes).

To access the Attributes tab:

1. In the Properties window, do one of the following:

– From the Properties window selection list, select a point.

– In the graphics window, select a point.

2. Select the Attributes tab.

Note – The Attributes tab is not available until you set up the project for attributes (from the Features tab of Project Properties dialog). For more information, see Setting up a Project for Features, page 30.

For more information on using attributes, see Chapter 16, Using Attributes in the Trimble Geomatics Office Software.

9.4.8 Renaming Points

If you have points with duplicate names in a project that are not to the same physical point, you can resolve the duplicate points by renaming them.

For example, you may import two Survey Controller (*.dc) files collected by different field crews. One field crew may use point names from 1000 to 2000, while the other crew uses point names from 1000 to 1050.

When the files are imported, 51 duplicate points (1000 to 1050) are created in the database.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 189

Page 214: TGO Manual Vol1

9 Viewing and Editing Data

To resolve the duplicate points, you can rename the points from the second .dc file:

1. To select the points, choose Select / Points. The Select Points dialog appears.

2. Click the drop-down arrow in the From source(s) field and select the name of the second .dc file from the list. All points from the second .dc file are selected.

3. Select Edit / Rename Points. The following dialog appears:

4. In the Rename dialog, use one of the available methods to rename the points. For example:, enter 2001 in the Rename from field to rename the points starting from 2001 (the points will be named 2001, 2002,..., 2051).

If the duplicate points are to the same point, then you should resolve them by merging. For information on merging duplicate points, see Managing Points with Duplicate Names, page 127.

Note – If you enter an alphabetic name in the Replace from field, all points in the selection will be given the same name. Enter a numeric value for the last character of the name to increment point names.

190 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 215: TGO Manual Vol1

Viewing and Editing Data 9

9.5 Viewing ObservationsYou can view the survey details of any observation type, such as:

• GPS observations

• Conventional observations

• Level observations

• Laser rangefinder observations

• Azimuth observations

• Reduced observations

The following sections describe how to use the Properties window to view the survey details for each observation type.

9.5.1 GPS Observations

Use the Properties window to view the details of any GPS observation type such as RTK, Static, FastStatic and postprocessed kinematic baselines.

To view the survey details of an observation:

1. In the Properties window, do one of the following:

– From the Properties window selection list, select a GPS observation.

– In the graphics window, select a GPS observation.

2. To select the types of survey details that you want to view, click a page button.

� Tip – To view an observation from or to a point, click the plus (+) icon beside the point. Then, click the observation that you want to view.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 191

Page 216: TGO Manual Vol1

9 Viewing and Editing Data

The following Properties window shows a typical page selected for a Real Time Kinematic (RTK) GPS observation. The page buttons shown are the same for all GPS observation types:

Table 9.5 summarizes the pages for GPS observations in the Properties window. For more information on each page, refer to the appropriate Help topic.

Table 9.5 Pages for GPS observations in the Properties window

Button Page name What it shows

Summary The observation details, including the from and to points, time of occupation, processor type, GPS field method, and status.

Use this page to view the observation details and to disable bad observations (such as when the observation produces a misclosure). If you do not want to use the observation in a network adjustment, but still want to use it in a recomputation, clear the Use in Network Adjustment check box.

Warning A warning message indicating that the baseline has failed the rejection criteria.

If you decide that the error on the observation is acceptable for the survey, use this page to view the error message and to suppress the warning flags displayed in the graphics window.

192 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 217: TGO Manual Vol1

Viewing and Editing Data 9

Base Occupation

The base, or from point, occupation details for the observation. This includes the point name, time of occupation, and antenna details.

If the antenna details have been incorrectly entered during the occupation, use this page to correct them for the base/from point.

Rover Occupation

The rover, or to point, occupation details for the observation. This includes the point name, time of occupation, and antenna details.

If the antenna details have been incorrectly entered during the occupation, use this page to correct them for the rover/to point occupation.

Observation The observation solution type, and the baseline components from the base point to the rover point.

If you have processed the baseline more than once, using different processing styles, the baseline may have more than one solution. Use this page to select the active solution and view the values of the GPS baseline in XYZ, geodetic, and delta NEU views.

Observation Statistics

The appropriate solution statistics and quality indicators depending on the observation type selected. The statistics are different for an RTK observation than for a static or postprocessed observation

Use this page to check the quality of the solution.

Table 9.5 Pages for GPS observations in the Properties window (Continued)

Button Page name What it shows

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 193

Page 218: TGO Manual Vol1

9 Viewing and Editing Data

9.5.2 Conventional Observations

Use the Properties window to view the details of any terrestrial observation measured in the field using a conventional instrument.

To view the survey details of an observation:

1. In the Properties window, do one of the following:

– From the Properties window selection list, select a conventional observation.

– In the graphics window, select a conventional observation.

2. To select the types of survey details that you want to view, click a page button.

� Tip – To view an observation from or to a point, click the plus (+) icon beside the point. Then, click the observation that you want to view.

The following Properties window shows a typical page selected for a conventional observation:

Table 9.6 summarizes the pages for conventional observations in the Properties window. For more information on each page, refer to the appropriate Help topics.

194 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 219: TGO Manual Vol1

Viewing and Editing Data 9

Table 9.6 Pages in the Properties window for conventional observations

Button Page name What it shows

Summary The instrument setup details including the instrument point name, instrument height and backsight details. The foresight point details are also shown.

Use this page to check the backsight details and to correct the instrument setup, such as when the instrument height has been incorrectly entered during the setup.

Use this page to disable bad observations when you do not want them used to determine the position of a point. If the observation is a check on a backsight point, enable the observation as a check. This ensures that the software reports a closure, but does not use the observation to determine the coordinate.

Target Setup The backsight point name and the target setup details; including the foresight point name, foresight point height, and prism constant.

Use this page to correct the setup details, such as when the height has been incorrectly entered during the setup.

Observation The observation components between the instrument and target setups.

Use this page to view the observation details in either HA,VA,SD or AZ,HD,VD views, and the observation type.

The observation type displays the face of the instrument used when the observation was taken. If the face is MTA, the observation is the mean of the turned angles between the backsight point and the observed point in the same setup.

Observation Statistics

The standard errors for the horizontal angle, vertical angle, and slope distance.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 195

Page 220: TGO Manual Vol1

9 Viewing and Editing Data

9.5.3 Level Observations

Use the Properties window to view the details of any level observation measured in the field, using a level.

To view the survey details of a level observation:

1. In the Properties window, do one of the following:

– From the Properties window selection list, select a level observation.

– In the graphics window, select a level observation.

Note – If your level observations do not have associated horizontal coordinates, you cannot see them in the graphics window. Use one of the selection tools to select level observations. For example, in the Select Observations dialog, select delta elevations from the type field and then open the Properties window.

– Click a page button to select the types of survey details that you want to view.

� Tip – To view an observation from or to a point, click the plus (+) icon beside the point. Then, click the observation that you want to view.

The following Properties window shows a typical page selected for a level observation:

196 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 221: TGO Manual Vol1

Viewing and Editing Data 9

Table 9.7 summarizes the pages for level observations in the Properties window. For more information on each page, refer to the appropriate Help topics.

9.5.4 Laser Rangefinder Observations

Use the Properties window to view the details of any terrestrial observation measured in the field using a laser rangefinder.

To view the survey details of a laser rangefinder observation:

1. In the Properties window, do one of the following:

– From the Properties window selection list, select a laser rangefinder observation.

– In the graphics window, select a laser rangefinder observation.

2. To select the types of survey details that you want to view, click a page button.

� Tip – To view an observation from or to a point, click the plus (+) icon beside the point. Then, click the observation that you want to view.

Table 9.7 Pages in the Properties window for level observations

Button Page name What it shows

Summary The from and to points, and the delta elevation of the observation.

Use this page to disable bad observations when you do not want them used to determine the height of a point.

Observation Statistics

The observation statistics for the level observation. Use this page to view the standard error, standard error unit, number of turns, and the length of line.

The standard error is calculated using the length of the line.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 197

Page 222: TGO Manual Vol1

9 Viewing and Editing Data

The following Properties window shows page for a laser observation:

Table 9.8 summarizes the pages for laser observations in the Properties window. For more information on each page, refer to the appropriate Help topic.

Table 9.8 Pages in the Properties window for laser observations

Button Page name What it shows

Summary The instrument point name and height, the target point name and height, and the status of the observation.

Use this page to correct the instrument and target heights if they have been incorrectly entered during the setup.

As laser rangefinder observations are of a lower quality than conventional observations, they are only used to coordinate points if there are no other types of observations to the points.

Use this page to disable the observation if you do not want it used to determine the position of a point.

If you want this observation used to derive the position of a point, (if no other enabled observations can be used) enable it as a check.

Observation The observation components between the laser and target setups.

If the vertical angle measurement is null, it is assumed that the distance is horizontal.

Use this page to view the observation values, and edit the magnetic declination of the observation.

198 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 223: TGO Manual Vol1

Viewing and Editing Data 9

9.5.5 Azimuth Observations

Use the Properties window to view details of azimuth observations. The azimuth observations can be from the field or keyed in.

� Tip – Use the Insert Azimuth dialog to insert an azimuth between two points.

To view the survey details of an azimuth observation:

1. In the Properties window, do one of the following:

– From the Properties window selection list, select an azimuth observation.

– In the graphics window, select an azimuth observation.

2. To select the types of survey details that you want to view, click a page button.

The following Properties window shows a typical page selected for an azimuth observation:

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 199

Page 224: TGO Manual Vol1

9 Viewing and Editing Data

Table 9.9 describes the page buttons for azimuth observations in the Properties window.

9.5.6 Reduced Observations

Use the Properties window to view the details of reduced terrestrial observations such as offsets that have been measured in the field using the Trimble Survey Controller software.

To view the survey details of a reduced observation:

1. In the Properties window, do one of the following:

– From the Properties window selection list, select a reduced observation.

– In the graphics window, select a reduced observation.

2. To select the types of survey details that you want to view, click a page button.

� Tip – To view an observation from or to a point, click the plus (+) icon beside the point. Then, click the observation that you want to view.

Table 9.9 Pages in the Properties window for azimuth observations

Button Page Name What it shows

Summary The from and to points, and the azimuth. Use this page to disable the observation if you do not want it used to determine the position of a point.

If you want this observation used to derive the position of a point (if no other enabled observations can be used), enable it as a check.

Warning A warning message indicating that the azimuth observation is out of tolerance.

Observation Statistics

The observation statistics for the level observation. Use this page to view the standard error, standard error unit, number of turns, and the length of line.

The standard error is calculated using the length of the line.

200 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 225: TGO Manual Vol1

Viewing and Editing Data 9

The following Properties window shows a typical page selected for a reduced observation:

Table 9.10 describes the page buttons for reduced observations in the Properties window.

Table 9.10 Pages in the Properties window for reduced observations

Button Page Name What it shows

Summary The from and to points, and the status of the observation.

Use this page to disable the observation if you do not want it used to determine the position of a point.

If you want this observation used to derive the position of a point, (if no other enabled observations can be used) enable it as a check.

Observation The observation components including the azimuth, horizontal distance, and vertical distance.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 201

Page 226: TGO Manual Vol1

9 Viewing and Editing Data

9.6 Viewing Erroneous DataThe Trimble Geomatics Office software may find the following errors:

• A point has been incorrectly observed.

• There is a misclosure between two or more observations to the same point.

When this happens, the graphics window displays a warning flag on the point or observation, and the Flag icon appears in the status bar.

Warning flags only indicate a possible error in the point; they do not disable the point.

Note – No matter how many suppressed flags a point has, if it has one enabled error flag, it will be shown as a flag in the graphics window.

You can view the warning details in the Properties window. To do this:

1. Do one of the following:

– Click the point or observation with a warning flag that you want to view.

– To select all entities with warning flags, double-click on the Flag icon in the status bar.

2. If you have more than one entity selected, in the Properties window select the point or observation that you want to view.

3. To open the Warning page, click the Warning Page button.

202 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 227: TGO Manual Vol1

Viewing and Editing Data 9

The following Properties window has information about a warning message:

The message describes the type of error that occurred.

If you are viewing the warning message for a point, you can view further point derivation details.

To do this:

• In the Warning page, select the Point Derivation tool.

• The software generates an HTML report. The report summarizes how the recomputation determined the calculated position for a point. Any misclosure that the recomputation determined was outside the tolerance set for the project appears in red with a Flag icon.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 203

Page 228: TGO Manual Vol1

9 Viewing and Editing Data

Resolve or suppress all warning flags before exporting coordinates. When you resolve an out-of-tolerance closure by disabling a bad observation or renaming the point if the observation was to a different physical point, the warning flag disappears. Table 9.11 shows the warning messages that may appear.

Table 9.11 Warning messages that may appear

Flag on Warning message What it means

Point Out-of-Tolerance Closure (Recomputation)

There are multiple observations to a point, where the difference between the calculated position from each observation is outside the tolerance set for the project.

There is a keyed-in coordinate for the point and an observation. The difference between the coordinate and the position calculated from the observation is outside the tolerance set for the project.

Point Out-of-Tolerance Observation (Recomputation)

There are multiple observations to a point, where the difference between an observed position and the mean of the observed positions as determined by a recomputation is outside the tolerance set for the project.

Point High RMS (RTK) A high RMS was detected in the field and may have been caused by bad initialization. Therefore, all points measured using this initialization are flagged.

The high RMS may also have been caused by obstructions such as tree foliage, so only the points collected near the tree are suspect.

If you are confident in the initialization, you can suppress the High RMS flags.

204 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 229: TGO Manual Vol1

Viewing and Editing Data 9

9.6.1 GPS Loop Closures

You can check the quality of, and identify any errors in, a set of GPS observations within a network by performing loop closures and viewing the Loop Closure report.

Use the failed loops sections of the Loop Closure report to identify:

• loops where the misclosures are outside the specified tolerance values

• GPS observations that do not fit in the network

• GPS station occupations for the baselines that do not fit in the network.

To perform loop closures on your GPS network and generate the Loop Closure report:

• Select Reports / GPS Loop Closures Report.

For information on GPS loop closures, refer to the WAVE Baseline Processing User Guide or the Help.

Observation Multiple failures(GPS Postprocessing)1

One or more of the acceptance criteria specified has not been satisfied.

Observation High RMS(GPS Postprocessing)1

The RMS of the active solution is outside the acceptance criteria.

Observation Low ratio(GPS Postprocessing)1

The ratio of the variance of the second best solution with the variance of the best solution is outside the acceptance criteria.

Observation High reference variance(GPS Postprocessing)1

The error in the solution did not compare satisfactorily with the expected error.

1After baseline processing, if you have the Baseline Processing module installed.

Table 9.11 Warning messages that may appear (Continued)

Flag on Warning message What it means

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 205

Page 230: TGO Manual Vol1

9 Viewing and Editing Data

9.7 Editing Survey DataDuring the inspection of the project, you identify problems with the survey data. The following sections describe the methods you can use to resolve these problems before you continue with the next task.

9.7.1 Changing the Status of Observations

By default, observations are always enabled. However, to determine whether a recomputation will use GPS or terrestrial observations to derive the calculated position of an observed point, change this enabled status. You can do the following:

• If you do not want an observation used to determine the position of a point, disable it.

The Recompute report does not report on disabled observations.

• If you only want an observation used if there are no other observations or coordinates available, enable it as a check.

To change the status of an observation:

1. Select the observation. For more information, see Selecting Entities, page 151.

2. Do one of the following:

– Select the Edit Properties tool to open the Properties window.

Click the Summary Page button to access the Summary page, and then select the appropriate option from the Status field.

– Select Edit / Enable/Disable Observation.

– Select Edit / Multiple Edit to open the Multiple Edit dialog. In the Survey tab, select the Set observation status to check box, and choose the appropriate option from the field.

– To enable an observation as a check, use the Properties window or the Multiple Edit dialog.

206 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 231: TGO Manual Vol1

Viewing and Editing Data 9

The appearance of the observation lines changes. For more information about colors and status of lines, see Changing the Recomputation Settings, page 32.

When your edits to the survey data could change the coordinates for a point in the database, the Recompute icon appears in the status bar.

3. To perform a recomputation, do one of the following:

– Select Survey / Recompute.

– Press ���� .

– In the Survey view, right-click to access the shortcut menu, and then select Recompute.

– In the status bar, double click the Recompute icon.

The recomputation reapplies the observation to determine the new calculated position for the point.

Note – If the difference between the derived position and the position calculated from an observation enabled as check is outside the tolerance set for the project, then a warning flag is generated on the point and the misclosure reported in the Recompute report.

9.7.2 Reversing the Direction of Observations

GPS and terrestrial observations flow out in the direction in which the baseline was observed. For RTK observations, the direction will be from the base to the rover. The direction of postprocessed Static and FastStatic baselines are based on the positional qualities of the from and to points. The direction is applied from the point with the higher quality to the point with the lower quality. For terrestrial observations, the direction will be from the instrument point to the target point.

A recomputation applies the observation in the direction that is stored in the project. For more information, see Appendix B, Recomputation.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 207

Page 232: TGO Manual Vol1

9 Viewing and Editing Data

You can reverse the direction of an observation so that a recomputation applies the observation in the opposite direction—this may change the calculated coordinates and qualities of the point.

� Warning – If the point that you want the observation to flow out from does not have a known position, the observation is not applied.

To reverse the direction of a GPS baseline, do the following:

1. Select the GPS observation.

For more information, see Selecting Entities, page 151.

2. Do one of the following:

– Select Edit / Reverse Observation flowout.

– Right-click to access the shortcut menu, and select Reverse Observation Flowout.

When the edits to the survey data could change the coordinates for a point in the database, the Recompute icon appears in the status bar.

3. Perform a recomputation, as shown in step 3, page 207.

The recomputation reapplies the observation to flow out from the opposite point.

208 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 233: TGO Manual Vol1

Viewing and Editing Data 9

9.8 Editing Multiple Entities at One TimeUse the Multiple Edit dialog to edit the survey- and CAD-related properties of more than one entity in your current selection set at the same time. This dialog lets you apply the same edits to a selection of entities.

You can correct the antenna or instrument heights for a group of stations if they have been incorrectly entered during setup. You can also add a group of entities to a specific layer.

To access the Multiple Edit dialog:

1. Select the entities that you want to edit. For more information, see Selecting Entities, page 151.

2. Select Edit / Multiple Edit. The following dialog appears:

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 209

Page 234: TGO Manual Vol1

9 Viewing and Editing Data

3. Do one of the following:

– Select the Survey tab to edit the survey-related properties of the selected entities.

– Select the CAD tab to edit the CAD-related properties of the selected entities.

Note – You can edit more than one field from either tab at any time.

210 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 235: TGO Manual Vol1

Viewing and Editing Data 9

The following sections describe how to use the Multiple Edit dialog to edit multiple entities for each property type. Not all options are discussed, so for more information, refer to the Help.

9.8.1 Editing the Survey-Related Properties of Selected Entities

To edit the survey-related properties of the entities in the current selection set, in the Multiple Edit dialog:

1. Make sure that the Survey tab is selected.

2. Select the check boxes to enable the common fields that you want to edit. For example, if you want to change the status of the selected observations, select the Set observation status to check box and then the option that you want.

Note – When you select a check box to edit a particular field, the Trimble Geomatics Office software checks the selected entities. If it finds that the fields are not used in the selected entities, it disables the check box option.

Editing the antenna heights of the selected entities

If the antenna heights for a group of surveyed points have been incorrectly entered in the field, you can select the points (for more information, see Selecting Entities, page 151) and use the Multiple Edit dialog to quickly correct them.

To do this, with the current selection set:

1. In the Survey tab, select the Set antenna height to check box. The Change heights of size and New antenna height fields become available. The Change heights of size field lists the current antenna heights of the selected points. You can only change the antenna heights with the selected values.

� Warning – If you have selected points with different antenna heights, you will get all antenna heights in your selection. Make sure that you change the correct antenna heights.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 211

Page 236: TGO Manual Vol1

9 Viewing and Editing Data

2. From the Change heights of size list, select the antenna height that you want to correct.

3. Enter the corrected antenna height value in the New Antenna height field and click OK. The operation changes all of the antenna heights to the correct values.

When the edits to the survey data could change the coordinates for a point in the database, the Recompute icon appears in the status bar.

4. Perform a recomputation, as shown in step 3, page 207.

The vectors are reapplied to the base and new antenna heights are used to calculate the new position. For more information, see Appendix B, Recomputation.

Editing the antenna details of multiple entities

To edit the antenna details of the selected points, in the Multiple Edit dialog:

1. In the Survey tab, select the GPS Antenna details to check box.

The Antenna type and Measured to fields become available. The Measured to field depends on the antenna type selected. If a new antenna type is selected, this field is cleared.

2. Select the correct antenna type and measurement method from the lists that you want to change.

3. Click OK.

The operation changes all of the antenna heights to the correct values. When the edits to the survey data could change the coordinates for a point in the database, the Recompute icon appears in the status bar.

4. Perform a recomputation, as shown in step 3, page 207.

212 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 237: TGO Manual Vol1

Viewing and Editing Data 9

9.8.2 Editing the CAD-Related Properties of Selected Entities

To edit the CAD-related properties of the entities in the current selection set, in the Multiple Edit dialog:

1. Select the CAD tab, as shown below:

2. Select the check boxes to enable the common fields that you want to edit. For example, to assign the selected points to a specific layer, select the Set layer to check box from the Perform these edits to the selected points group.

3. Specify the values that you want applied to the selected entities. For example, to add the points to the Utilities layer, select Utilities or enter the layer name in the Set layer to field.

4. Click OK.

The software adds the selected points to the Utilities layer.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 213

Page 238: TGO Manual Vol1

9 Viewing and Editing Data

9.9 Using the Data Analysis ToolsThe following sections describe the tools that are available to help you analyze your data. For example, you can check the inverse between two points, or determine the extent of the survey area.

9.9.1 Viewing the Inverse Between Two Points

You can display the inverse to determine the difference between any two points in the project. To do this:

1. Do one of the following:

– Select Survey / Inverse.

– Press ���� .

The following dialog appears and the pointer changes to Measure mode:

You can use field fill-in to select the points defining the inverse from the graphics window.

2. With the From field selected, click the starting point in the graphics window.

214 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 239: TGO Manual Vol1

Viewing and Editing Data 9

A dotted line appears to show that the software will compute the inverse as soon as you move the mouse pointer close to another existing database point.

3. With the To field selected, click the end point in the graphics window.

The Grid azimuth, Grid distance, and Delta elevation fields display the inverse details. The dotted line becomes solid to show the line that the inverse details refer to.

4. To view additional details on the inverse, click Detailed.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 215

Page 240: TGO Manual Vol1

9 Viewing and Editing Data

The Inverse dialog enlarges to display the Details group. The Details group shows the forward and back geodetic azimuths (computed along the normal section of the ellipsoid), the ellipsoid and ground distances, and the delta ellipsoid height. For information on each component, refer to the Help.

5. Click Send to report to generate a brief or detailed report of the inverse depending on the display option used. The report is stored as Inverse.html in the Reports folder.

6. To view the report, do one of the following:

– Click Show report.

– Select Reports / Inverse Report.

216 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 241: TGO Manual Vol1

Viewing and Editing Data 9

9.9.2 Measuring Positions Within the Graphics Window

You can measure the distance, azimuth, and any area from the graphics window. This is useful if you want to quickly determine the extent of the survey area. To do this:

1. Select Survey / Measure. The following dialog appears:

The pointer changes to Measure mode. You can use field fill-in to click any position in the graphics window and define the object being measured.

2. Click the positions in succession to define the object being measured.

Note – The Measure pointer snaps to any point that it goes near. To avoid this, press ������ when using the pointer.

Once you have selected two or more positions, the cumulative distance from the first selected point is shown in the Distance field. The Azimuth field shows the azimuth between the last two selected positions. The software reports the distances and azimuths according to the display settings in the Units and Format tab of the Project Properties dialog. For more information, see Chapter 3, Setting up a Project.

With three or more points selected, the software shows the area of the figure formed by closing back to the first point. The units of the computed area vary depending on the distance display settings. For more information, refer to the Help.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 217

Page 242: TGO Manual Vol1

9 Viewing and Editing Data

� Tip – If you click and drag a box over an area, the dialog fields show the current azimuth, the cumulative distance from the first selected point, and the area enclosed.

9.10Viewing Note RecordsNote records are non-graphical entities in the project. That is, they do not appear, and they cannot be selected in the graphics window. If you import a job from the Trimble Survey Controller containing user-entered notes, you can use the Properties window to view them.

To select and view note records:

1. Do one of the following:

– Choose Select / Selection Sets. Choose the name of the .dc file that you have imported that contains the notes you want to view.

– Choose Select / By Query. From the list, select Notes.

2. Open the Properties window. The Properties window displays all note entities with a Pencil icon.

3. Select the note that you want to view.

The following Properties window shows the note details:

218 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 243: TGO Manual Vol1

Viewing and Editing Data 9

� Tip – To create a custom report to display all note records, select Note records from the Report on field in the Define Report Format dialog. For more information, see Appendix A, Custom Import, Export, and Report Formats.

9.11Viewing CAD EntitiesUse the Properties window to view and edit the properties of CAD entities in the selection that appear in the Plan view, such as:

• lines

• curves

• arcs

• text

• annotations

The following sections describe how to use the Properties window to view each type.

9.11.1 Linework (Lines, Arcs, Curves)

Use the Properties window to view the details of linework entities such as lines, curves and arcs.

To view the details of a line, curve, or arc, in the Properties window:

1. Do one of the following:

– From the Properties window selection list, select an entity.

– In the graphics window, select an entity. For information, see Selecting Entities, page 151.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 219

Page 244: TGO Manual Vol1

9 Viewing and Editing Data

The following Properties window shows the details of a line:

2. To edit the layer or line style, select an option from the field or enter a new value.

If a layer or line style has not been specified for a linetype, the software uses the default settings.

� Tip – To view the points that the linetype entity connects to, click the plus (+) icon beside the entity. You can then click a point to view.

9.11.2 Text

To view the details of a text entity, in the Properties window:

1. Do one of the following:

– From the Properties window selection list, select a text entity.

– In the graphics window, select a text entity. For information, see Selecting Entities, page 151.

220 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 245: TGO Manual Vol1

Viewing and Editing Data 9

The following Properties window shows the details of a selected text entity:

2. To edit the properties of a text entity, select an option from the field or enter a new value.

If you do not specify a layer or text style for a point, the software uses the default settings.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 221

Page 246: TGO Manual Vol1

9 Viewing and Editing Data

9.11.3 Annotations

Use the Properties window to view the details on annotations that are associated with points or line types in the project.

To view the details of an annotation, in the Properties window:

1. Do one of the following:

– From the Properties window selection list, select an annotation.

– In the graphics window, select an annotation. For information, see Selecting Entities, page 151.

The following Properties window shows annotation details:

The Text expression field shows the definition displayed for the assigned entity. Any expressions enclosed in square brackets are treated as field codes and are used to display information about the entity. For example, [Feature code] will display the feature code value for the point in the project. For more information, see Appendix A, Custom Import, Export, and Report Formats.

2. To edit the properties of an annotation, select an option from the field or enter a new value.

� Tip – To view the entity associated with the annotation, click the plus (+) icon beside the annotation. Then, click on the entity that you want to view and edit.

222 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 247: TGO Manual Vol1

C H A P T E R

10

10 GPS Site Calibration

In this chapter:

Q Introduction

Q Selecting the calibration components

Q Selecting the calibration point pairs

Q Computing the calibration parameters

Q Analyzing the calibration parameters

Q Viewing a report

Q Applying the calibration

Q Using a GPS site calibration in future projects

Page 248: TGO Manual Vol1

10 GPS Site Calibration

10.1IntroductionA GPS site calibration establishes the relationship between WGS-84 points collected by GPS receivers, and local grid positions on a local map grid. The local map grid includes elevations above sea level, and the GPS data includes WGS-84 heights.

Published coordinate systems and geoid models do not usually allow for local variations in the projection. You can perform a GPS site calibration to reduce these variations and obtain more accurate local grid coordinates.

If you use data collected from terrestrial instruments only, you do not need to perform a GPS site calibration.

10.2Selecting the Calibration ComponentsTo select which calibration parameters to include in the calibration calculations, use the GPS Site Calibration dialog.

To access it:

• Select Survey / GPS Site Calibration. The following dialog appears:

224 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 249: TGO Manual Vol1

GPS Site Calibration 10

Note – If you perform an adjustment with the Network Adjustment module, and compute adjustment transformation parameters, when you access the dialog the following message appears:

Proceeding with this operation will remove the adjustment transformation parameters.

You can only use one set of parameters derived from either a calibration or an adjustment. Network adjustment transformation parameters cannot be transferred to the Trimble Survey Controller software. If you want to transfer control points and a calibration to the Trimble Survey Controller software and your project coordinate system has network adjustment transformation parameters, you must first perform a GPS site calibration. For more information, refer to the topic Calibration and Adjustment Transformation Parameters in the Help.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 225

Page 250: TGO Manual Vol1

10 GPS Site Calibration

To select the calibration components to be calculated, use the Calibration Components group in the dialog. You can calculate:

• a datum transformation (seven-parameter or three-parameter)

• an update of the default Transverse Mercator projection origin (if applicable)

• a horizontal adjustment

• a vertical adjustment

10.2.1 Computing a Datum Transformation

If you are using a published coordinate system, a predefined datum transformation is usually specified, for example, a three- or seven-parameter transformation, a multiple regression definition, or a Datum Grid file (NADCON). In these cases, it is unlikely that you will require a different datum transformation, so make sure that the Datum Transformation check box is clear. However, if there is no datum transformation information available, or if you have reason to doubt the available parameters, then compute a datum transformation.

To compute a datum transformation:

1. In the GPS Site Calibration dialog, select the Datum transformation check box. The Three parameter and Seven parameter options become available.

2. Select the option for the transformation that you want to compute.

For more information, refer to the topics Three-Parameter Transformation and Seven-Parameter Transformation in the Help.

Note – This option is not available with projects that have the default projection coordinate system, because the default projection is based directly on the WGS-84 ellipsoid. This means that no datum transformation is required.

226 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 251: TGO Manual Vol1

GPS Site Calibration 10

10.2.2 Updating Default Projection Origin

The Update default projection origin check box in the GPS Site Calibration dialog is only available if the current coordinate system is the default Transverse Mercator projection.

As the default projection has neither a latitude and longitude origin, nor a false northing and false easting defined, updating the origin ensures that the origin of the projection is local; that is, it is close to the survey data in your project.

To update the default projection origin using the first two-dimensional point pair used:

• Select the Update default projection origin check box.

If you are carrying out a GPS calibration on a project that already has the default projection defined, clear this check box. The default projection definition does not change.

10.2.3 Computing a Horizontal Adjustment

A horizontal adjustment is a plane transformation consisting of:

• translations in the north/south and east/west directions

• a rotation around a defined origin

• a scale factor

The software computes transformation parameters using least-squares methods to find the transformation that gives the adjustment parameters that, when applied to GPS positions, best fit the control grid coordinates. The horizontal adjustment minimizes any residual error between the control grid coordinates and the grid coordinates calculated from the GPS positions.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 227

Page 252: TGO Manual Vol1

10 GPS Site Calibration

To include a horizontal adjustment:

1. In the GPS Site Calibration dialog, select the Horizontal adjustment check box. The Set scale factor to 1 check box becomes available.

2. To force the scale in the computed calibration to one, select this check box.

� Tip – Initially, compute a horizontal adjustment without the scale factor set to one. This determines if the computed scale factor is close to one. If the computed scale factor is not close to 1, check the selected calibration point pairs.

10.2.4 Computing a Vertical Adjustment

A vertical adjustment is an inclined plane adjustment that consists of:

• a vertical shift at a defined origin

• inclinations in the north and east directions.

This requires three 3-dimensional calibration point pairs. The parameters for this adjustment are computed using least squares methods. The least squares calculation finds an adjustment plane that best fits the elevations derived from the GPS heights with the control point elevations. With one 3-dimensional calibration point pair, only the vertical shift parameter can be computed. If there are two 3-dimensional control point pairs available, the system defines a correction plane that exactly fits these pairs.

If the project uses a geoid model, then the vertical adjustment is computed and applied on top of the geoid model corrections.

To include a vertical adjustment:

• In the GPS Site Calibration dialog, select the Vertical adjustment check box.

228 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 253: TGO Manual Vol1

GPS Site Calibration 10

10.3Selecting the Calibration Point PairsUse the Point List dialog to select the calibration point pairs you want to use to calculate the GPS site calibration parameters. A calibration point pair consists of:

• a GPS point (a point with a GPS position or derived from GPS data)

• a grid point (not a GPS derived point), which is normally a control point (or an adjusted point)

Note – If a point is derived from a grid position and a GPS vector, it cannot be selected as a GPS or grid point for calibration.

As you select or specify points for inclusion in the point list, the Trimble Geomatics Office software checks that each GPS point has a GPS derivation, and that each grid point does not have a GPS derivation. When a point does not conform to these requirements, an error message appears.

Trimble recommends that you use at least four 3-dimensional control point pairs. This is because using four or more control point pairs provides redundancy in the results.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 229

Page 254: TGO Manual Vol1

10 GPS Site Calibration

10.3.1 Selecting Calibration Point Pairs

1. Select Survey / GPS Site Calibration. The GPS Site Calibration dialog appears.

2. Click Point List. The following dialog appears:

Use it to specify the calibration point pairs from which the calibration parameters are computed.

3. In the first GPS Point field, to select the first GPS point you want to use in the calibration, do one of the following:

– Use field fill-in and click an existing GPS point.

– Enter the name of the GPS point.

– Expand the GPS Point field (click the plus sign next to the field) and enter the WGS-84 latitude, WGS-84 longitude, and WGS-84 height in the appropriate fields. The latitude and longitude position is used in the calibration computation, but a GPS point is not added to the database.

A box appears on the GPS point in the graphics window.

230 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 255: TGO Manual Vol1

GPS Site Calibration 10

4. Complete the calibration point pair. To do this, use one of the following methods to select the grid point associated with the GPS point you selected in the previous step:

– Use field fill-in and click an existing grid point.

– Enter the name of the grid point.

– Expand the Grid Point field and enter the northing, easting, and elevation in the appropriate fields. The northing and easting position is used in the calibration computation, but a grid point is not added to the database.

The following occurs:

– A cross appears on the grid point in the graphics window.

– A line appears between the GPS point and the grid point.

– The Type field is filled in.

If the calibration point pair is three-dimensional, the Type field is set to Horz and Vert. If you do not want to use the calibration point pair in the vertical adjustment computation, change the type to Horizontal. If you do not want to use the calibration point pair in the horizontal adjustment computation, change the type to Vertical.

If the calibration point pair is two-dimensional, the Type field is set to Horizontal. You cannot change this value because all other types are invalid.

If the calibration point pair is one-dimensional, the Type field is set to Vertical. You cannot change the Type field as all other options are invalid.

Note – If you have a point defined with an underlying grid and a WGS-84 point, the point list is populated with the grid point when you include a GPS point.

5. Repeat step 1 to step 4 to select all of the calibration point pairs that you want to use in the calibration.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 231

Page 256: TGO Manual Vol1

10 GPS Site Calibration

� Tip – The Statistics group shows the scale factor, vertical adjustment inclination, and residuals for the calibration, based on the data entered in the point list. Use these statistics to ensure that the data you have entered is correct.

6. Once you have entered all of the calibration point pairs you want to use, click Close. The GPS Site Calibration dialog returns.

� Tip – To select all of the calibration points in the graphics window that are defined in the point list, choose Select / Calibration Points.

10.4Computing the Calibration ParametersOnce you select the calibration point pairs for the GPS site calibration, the Compute button in the GPS Site Calibration dialog becomes available. When you click this button, the Trimble Geomatics Office software uses the selected calibration point pairs to compute the GPS site calibration parameters.

You can perform any number of GPS site calibrations in a project. If you apply a new calibration to a project, the coordinate system is updated with the new calibration parameters, and all points in the database are updated with the new coordinate system values.

232 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 257: TGO Manual Vol1

GPS Site Calibration 10

10.5Analyzing the Calibration ParametersWhen GPS site calibration parameters have been computed, a summary of the quality of the calibration parameters appears in the Computation summary group. Use the summary to confirm that the computed calibration is valid.

Table 10.1 shows the computation summary parameters:

Note – To change the maximum error and maximum iteration count, use the Windows Registry on your computer. For more information, refer to the topic Changing Calibration Settings Using the Registry in the Help.

Table 10.1 Computation summary group parameters

Field Description

Horizontal adjustment scale factor

Shows the computed scale factor for the Horizontal adjustment. If you select the Set scale factor to 1 check box, the field displays one. Use it to confirm that the computed scale factor is close to one. If it is not, there is a problem with one or more of the calibration point pairs.

Max vertical adjustment inclination

Shows the maximum inclination for the computed height adjustment based on the computed Slope north and Slope east values. Check that this value is consistent with accepted values for your area.

Max horizontal residual and Max vertical residual

Shows the maximum residuals for the last computation carried out. The software warns you if the maximum horizontal residual error is greater than the value specified in the registry settings. Check that these values are within expected ranges; normally in the order of centimeters.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 233

Page 258: TGO Manual Vol1

10 GPS Site Calibration

If any of the fields in the Computation summary group of the GPS Site Calibration dialog are not within expected ranges, use one of the following methods to find the problem calibration point pairs:

• Examine the calibration point pairs.

To find an error in a GPS site calibration:

– Repeat the GPS site calibration procedure but leave out a different point pair each time. When the computation summary values are what you expect, this means that you have found the problem pair.

• Check that the grid points have the correct coordinates.

• Check that you have the best known coordinates for the base point of your GPS survey. If the errors in the calibration are small, they may be caused by errors in the observations. An error in the observation of up to one part per million (1 ppm) can be introduced by each 10 m (33 ft) of error in the base coordinates. If you reobserve with a more accurate base position, you may improve the observations and hence the calibration results.

If you locate an error in one of the calibration point pairs, fix the error and recalibrate. If you cannot fix the error, delete the calibration point pair from the point list and recalibrate.

234 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 259: TGO Manual Vol1

GPS Site Calibration 10

10.6Viewing a ReportTo view a report of the last computed GPS site calibration:

• In the GPS Site Calibration dialog, click Report.

A detailed report of the calibration computation, named Calibration.html, appears in the default HTML viewer on your computer.

Use the report to inspect the individual calibration parameters. The report is saved in the project’s Reports folder. When you recalibrate, a new report overwrites the old one.

10.6.1 Calibration Report

The Calibration report includes:

• Project details

• Datum transformation parameters

• Updated default projection definition

• Horizontal adjustment parameters

• Vertical adjustment parameters

• Geoid model definition

• Residual differences between GPS and known coordinates

The following sections describe each part of the Calibration report and include report samples where appropriate.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 235

Page 260: TGO Manual Vol1

10 GPS Site Calibration

The Project Details section

Figure 10.1 shows the Project Details section. This section shows the project details, including the project name and the coordinate system used.

Figure 10.1 Project Details section of a Calibration report

The Datum Transformation Parameters section

Figure 10.2 shows the Datum Transformation Parameters section. This section shows the datum transformation method used in the calibration and the computed parameters.

Figure 10.2 Datum Transformation section of a Calibration report

The Updated Default Projection (Transverse Mercator) Definition section

The Updated Default Project (Transverse Mercator) Definition section shows the updated projection origin values (when the Update default projection origin option has been selected).

236 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 261: TGO Manual Vol1

GPS Site Calibration 10

The Horizontal Adjustment Parameters section

Figure 10.3 shows the Horizontal Adjustment Parameters section. This section shows the horizontal adjustment parameters computed from the calibration.

Figure 10.3 Horizontal Adjustment Parameters section of a Calibration report

The Vertical Adjustment Parameters section

Figure 10.4 shows the Vertical Adjustment Parameters section. This section shows the vertical adjustment parameters computed from the calibration.

Figure 10.4 Vertical Adjustment Parameters section of a Calibration report

The Geoid Model Definition section

The Geoid Model Definition section shows the name of the geoid model used for the project.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 237

Page 262: TGO Manual Vol1

10 GPS Site Calibration

The Residual Differences Between GPS and Known Coordinates section

The Residual Differences Between GPS and Known Coordinates section shows the residual differences between the point pairs used in the calibration. Use this section to identify suspect point pairs.

This section includes:

• Summary

• Point residuals

Figure 10.5 shows the Summary subsection. This subsection shows the maximum residuals and the associated GPS points.

Figure 10.5 Residual Differences Between GPS and Known Coordinate – Summary section of a Calibration report

The Point Residuals subsection shows all of the point pairs used in the calibration, and the residual differences. Any point pairs that have residuals greater than the value specified in the registry setting on your computer are shown in red.

238 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 263: TGO Manual Vol1

GPS Site Calibration 10

10.7Applying the CalibrationTo apply the last computed GPS site calibration:

• In the GPS Site Calibration dialog, click OK.

The Trimble Geomatics Office software updates the project coordinate system with the calibration parameters.

To view the coordinate system details:

1. Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog appears.

2. In the Coordinate System tab, click Details. The Project Coordinate System Details dialog appears.

3. Select the Adjustment tab to view the horizontal and vertical GPS site calibration parameters.

The software performs a recomputation and updates the database with the new calibration parameters.

10.8Using a GPS Site Calibration in Future ProjectsIf you plan to do future fieldwork in the immediate area, save the coordinate system (which includes the calibration parameters) as a site. You can then use the site as the coordinate system for future projects.

To do this:

1. In the GPS Site Calibration dialog, click Save as Site. The Save as Site dialog appears.

2. Enter a name for the site and then click OK.

The site is saved to the coordinate system database.

To use a saved GPS site calibration (as a site) in another project, make sure that the project area is within the points used in the GPS site calibration.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 239

Page 264: TGO Manual Vol1

10 GPS Site Calibration

If you select the site for a new project that is within the area covered by the points used in the original calibration, you do not need to carry out another GPS site calibration.

For example, in Figure 10.6, save the GPS site calibration as a site in project A, then use the site in project B. However, do not use the site in project C because the area is outside the points used in the GPS site calibration.

Figure 10.6 Site used for other projects

Project C areaProject B area

Points used incalibration inProject A

240 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 265: TGO Manual Vol1

GlossaryThis section explains some of the terms used in this manual.

1-sigma One standard error from the mean.

a posteriori errors The a priori errors multiplied by the standard error of unit weight (reference factor) resulting from a network adjustment.

a priori errors Errors estimated for observations prior to a network adjustment.

AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

accuracy The closeness of a measurement to the actual (true) value of the quantity being measured.

adjusted values Values derived from observed data (measurement) by applying a process of eliminating errors in that data in a network adjustment.

adjustment The process of determining and applying corrections to observations for the purpose of reducing errors in a network adjustment.

adjustmentconvergence

When the network adjustment has met the defined residual tolerance or last ditch residual tolerance within a defined number of iterations.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 241

Page 266: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

adjustment datum The datum used in the current network adjustment iteration. The Trimble Geomatics Office software lets you select either the project datum or WGS-84.

adjustment styles Trimble default and user-defined settings for a network adjustment.

algebraic sign The sign (+ or -) associated with a value which designates it as a positive or negative number.

algorithm A set of rules for solving a problem in a finite number of steps.

almanac Data transmitted by a GPS satellite that includes orbit information on all the satellites, clock correction, and atmospheric delay parameters. The almanac facilitates rapid SV acquisition. The orbit information is a subset of the ephemeris data with reduced precision.

ambiguity The unknown integer number of cycles of the reconstructed carrier phase contained in an unbroken set of measurements. The receiver counts the radio waves (from the satellite as they pass the antenna) to a high degree of accuracy. However, it has no information on the number of waves to the satellite at the time it started counting. This unknown number of wavelengths between the satellite and the antenna is the ambiguity. Also known as integer ambiguity or integer bias.

annotation A piece of text that describes another database record. To select and edit annotations, use the Properties window. An annotation is live—any fields are re-expanded whenever the parent entity changes.

242 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 267: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

antenna height The height of a GPS antenna phase center above the point being observed.

The uncorrected antenna height is measured from the observed point to a designated point on the antenna, then corrected to the true vertical manually or automatically in the software.

antenna phasecorrection

The phase center for a GPS antenna is neither a physical nor a stable point. The phase center for a GPS antenna changes with respect to the changing direction of the signal from a satellite. Most of the phase center variation depends on satellite elevation. Modeling this variation in antenna phase center location allows a variety of antenna types to be used in a single survey. Antenna phase center corrections are not as critical when two of the same antenna are used since common errors cancel out.

Anti-Spoofing (AS) A feature that allows the U.S. Department of Defense to transmit an encrypted Y-code in place of P-code. Y-code is intended to be useful only to authorized (primarily military) users. AS is used to deny the full precision of GPS to civilian users.

APC Antenna Phase Center

The electronic center of the antenna. It often does not correspond to the physical center of the antenna. The radio signal is measured at the APC.

In the Properties window the height of a point may be the elevation of the APC. If the height is specified as APC, it is the height of the APC—not the ground height.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 243

Page 268: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

autonomouspositioning

A mode of operation in which a GPS receiver computes position fixes in real time from satellite data alone, without reference to data supplied by a base station. Autonomous positioning is the least precise positioning procedure a GPS receiver can perform, yielding position fixes that are precise to ±100 meters horizontal RMS when Selective Availability is in effect, and to ±10–20 meters when it is not. Also known as absolute positioning and point positioning.

azimuth A surveying observation used to measure the angle formed by a horizontal baseline and geodetic north. When applied to GPS observations, it refers to a normal section azimuth.

base station An antenna and receiver set up on a known location. It is used for real-time kinematic (RTK) or differential surveys. Data can be recorded at the base station for later postprocessing. A Trimble base station consists of a receiver in Base Station mode used with the Trimble Reference Station (TRS™) software or the Universal Reference Station (URS™) software.

In GPS surveying practice, you observe and compute baselines (that is, the position of one receiver relative to another). The base station acts as the position from which all other unknown positions are derived.

baseline The position of a point relative to another point. In GPS surveying, this is the position of one receiver relative to another. When the data from these two receivers is combined, the result is a baseline comprising a three-dimensional vector between the two stations.

244 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 269: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

baseline processor A computer program that computes baseline solutions from satellite measurements. It may run as a postprocessor on a personal computer, or as a real-time processor in a receiver. WAVE (Weighted Ambiguity Vector Estimator) is Trimble’s baseline processor.

baud A unit of data transfer speed (from one binary digital device to another) used when describing serial communications.

bivariate Mathematical function describing the behavior of two-dimensional random errors in error ellipses for:

northing/easting

latitude/longitude

X/Y

CAD styles CAD styles define the appearance of points, lines, arcs, curves, text, and annotations in a project. A style, for example, can be made up of a symbol, line type, color, or font. Style definitions are stored in a project.

To have styles available for a number of projects, define the styles in a template project.

calibrated site A site definition uses an existing coordinate system definition plus correction transformation. This makes the best fit for GPS data in a specific area (or site). The extra correction transformations are required because a coordinate system is designed to apply over a very large area. It does not allow for variations in the local coordinates.

You need to have new work fit with the existing control, so the extra correction transformations will correct for these local variations. Extra corrections are only valid over a limited area. This explains the ‘site’ terminology.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 245

Page 270: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

The Trimble Geomatics Office software can compute the extra transformations required to fit to local control and save these definitions in the coordinate system database.

calibrationcoordinates

WGS-84 coordinates (latitude/longitude/ellipsoid height) generated from a minimally constrained network adjustment of your GPS observation, then saved for later use in a GPS site calibration.

The calibration coordinates are used as the GPS observed coordinates that are associated with the grid coordinates of a particular point when performing a calibration.

Cartesian coordinates

See Earth-Centered-Earth-Fixed Cartesian coordinates.

chi-square test An overall statistical test of the network adjustment. It is a test of the sum of the weight squares of the residuals, the number of degrees of freedom and a critical probability of 95 percent or greater.

The purpose of this test is to reject or to accept the hypothesis that the predicted errors have been accurately estimated.

clock offset The constant difference in the time reading between two clocks. In GPS, usually refers to offset between SV clocks and the clock in the user’s receiver.

closure Agreement between measured and known parts of a network.

CMR Compact Measurement Record

A satellite measurement message that is broadcast by the base receiver and used by real-time kinematic (RTK) surveys to calculate an accurate baseline vector from the base to the rover.

246 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 271: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

Coarse Acquisition(C/A) code

A pseudorandom noise (PRN) code modulated onto an L1 signal. This code helps the receiver compute the distance from the satellite.

code The GPS code is a pseudorandom noise (PRN) code that is modulated onto the GPS carrier signals.

The C/A code is unclassified and is available for use by civilian applications.

The P code is also known and unclassified, but may be encrypted for national defense purposes.

Code measurements are the basis of GPS navigation and positioning. Code also is used in conjunction with carrier phase measurements to obtain more accurate survey quality baseline solutions.

component One of the three surveying observations used to define a three-dimensional baseline between two control points. The same baseline can be defined by azimuth, delta height, and distance (in ellipsoid coordinates); by delta X, delta Y, and delta Z (in Earth Centered Cartesian coordinates); and by delta north, delta east, and delta up (in local plane coordinates).

constellation A specific set of satellites used in calculating positions: three satellites for 2D fixes, four satellites for 3D fixes.

All satellites visible to a GPS receiver at one time. The optimum constellation is the constellation with the lowest PDOP. See also PDOP.

constrained To hold (fix) a quantity (observation and coordinate) as true in a network adjustment.

constraint External limitations imposed upon the adjustable quantities (observations and coordinates) in a network adjustment.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 247

Page 272: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

control point A monumented point to which coordinates have been, or are in the process of being, assigned by the use of surveying observations.

conventionalobservation

An observation in the field obtained using a total station or theodolite.

coordinate system A set of transformations that allow GPS positions (in the WGS-84 ellipsoid) to be transformed to projection coordinates with elevations above the Geoid.

It consists of a datum transformation, a geoid model allocation, and a coordinate projection definition.

The datum transformation is defined in the coordinate system database. It includes the definition of the datum on which the coordinate projection is based.

An existing geoid model can be assigned to the coordinate system, but it is also possible to specify a constant geoidal separation rather than using a geoid model. Use the Trimble Coordinate System Manager utility to define geoid models in the coordinate system database.

You can allocate some coordinate projection types to a coordinate system (for example, Transverse Mercator or Lambert One Parallel). Different countries and regions use different projection types to achieve optimum results (that is, minimum distortion) in the projection coordinates. The coordinate projection methods project latitude and longitude values on the appropriate datum to Cartesian coordinate values. The elevations for the projection coordinates are achieved using the geoid model assigned to the coordinate system.

The Trimble Coordinate System Manager utility lets you view, edit, and add to the coordinate system definitions supplied with the Trimble Geomatics Office software.

248 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 273: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

correlated Said of two or more observations (or derived quantities) which have at least one common source of error.

covariance A measure of the correlation of errors between two observations or derived quantities. Also refers to an off-diagonal term (that is, not a variance) in a variance-covariance matrix.

covariance matrix A matrix that defines the variance and covariance of an observation. The elements of the diagonal are the variance and all elements on either side of the diagonal are the covariance.

covariant values As used by the Trimble Geomatics Office software, this is the publication of the propagated (computed) a posteriori errors in azimuth, distance, and height between pairs of control points resulting from a network adjustment. The term covariant indicates that this computation involves the use of covariant terms in the variance-covariance matrix of adjusted control points.

current view You can open more than one view onto the database using the Window / New Window command. Each of these views can have different view settings. The current view is the view that has focus and this is identified by the use of the active title bar.

cycle slip An interruption in a receiver’s lock onto a satellite’s radio signals. A cycle slip requires the re-estimation of integer ambiguity terms during baseline processing.

data logging The process of recording satellite data in a file stored in the receiver, on a data collector running the Trimble Survey Controller software, or on a survey data card.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 249

Page 274: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

data message A message, included in the GPS signal, that reports on the location and health of the satellites as well as any clock correction. It includes information about the health of other satellites as well as their approximate position.

datum A mathematical model of the earth designed to fit part or all of the geoid. It is defined by the relationship between an ellipsoid and a point on the topographic surface established as the origin of the datum. It is usually referred to as a geodetic datum.

The size and shape of an ellipsoid, and the location of the center of the ellipsoid with respect to the center of the earth, usually define world geodetic datums.

datum defect Unknown discrepancies between two sets of coordinates which can only be rectified by the use of a datum transformation as part of a network adjustment.

datum transformation

Defines the transformation that is used to transform the coordinates of a point defined in one datum to coordinates in a different datum.

There are a number of different datum transformation methods supported by the Trimble Geomatics Office software:

Seven-Parameter

Three-Parameter (also referred to as Molodensky)

Multiple Regression

Datum Grid

Datum transformations usually convert data collected in the WGS-84 datum (by GPS methods) onto datums used for surveying and mapping purposes in individual regions and countries.

250 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 275: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

de-correlate To remove the covariances between observations. This may be done through elaborate orthogonal transformations, or by computing separate horizontal and vertical adjustments.

deflection of thevertical

The angular difference between the upward direction of the plumb line (vertical) and the perpendicular (normal) to the ellipsoid.

degrees of freedom A measure of the redundancy in a network.

delta elevation The difference in elevation between two points.

delta height The vertical component in the Trimble Geomatics Office software’s expression of GPS baselines. It is the difference in height or change of height.

delta N, delta E, delta U

Coordinate differences expressed in a Local Geodetic Horizon coordinate system.

delta X, delta Y, delta Z

Coordinate differences expressed in a Cartesian coordinate system.

differential positioning

The precise measurement of the relative position of two receivers that are tracking the same satellites simultaneously.

DOP Dilution of Precision

An indicator of the quality of a GPS position. It takes account of each satellite’s location relative to the other satellites in the constellation, and their geometry in relation to the GPS receiver. A low DOP value indicates a higher probability of accuracy.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 251

Page 276: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

Standard DOPs for GPS applications are:

PDOP Position (three coordinates)

HDOP Horizontal (two horizontal coordinates)

RDOP

VDOP Vertical (height only)

TDOP Time (clock offset only)

Doppler shift The apparent change in frequency of a signal caused bythe relative motion of satellites and the receiver.

double differencing An arithmetic method of differencing carrier phasessimultaneously measured by two receivers tracking thesame satellites. This method removes the satellite andreceiver clock errors.

DTM Digital Terrain Model

An electronic representation of terrain in three-dimensions.

dual-frequency A type of receiver that uses both L1 and L2 signals fromGPS satellites. A dual-frequency receiver can computemore precise position fixes over longer distances andunder more adverse conditions because it compensates forionospheric delays.

Earth-Centered-Earth-Fixed (ECEF)

A Cartesian coordinate system used by the WGS-84reference frame. In this coordinate system, the center ofthe system is at the earth's center of mass. The z axis iscoincident with the mean rotational axis of the earth andthe x axis passes through 0° N and 0° E. The y axis isperpendicular to the plane of the x and z axes.

easting Eastward reading of grid values. Left to right on a grid(X-axis).

252 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 277: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

elevation The height above mean sea level or the vertical distance above the geoid. Elevation is sometimes referred to as the orthometric height.

elevation mask An angle which is normally set to 13 degrees. If you track satellites from above this angle, you usually avoid interference caused by buildings, trees, and multipath errors.

Trimble recommends that you do not track satellites from below 13 degrees.

ellipsoid A mathematical model of the earth formed by rotating an ellipse around its minor axis. For ellipsoids that model the earth, the minor axis is the polar axis, and the major axis is the equatorial axis.

You define an ellipsoid by specifying the lengths of both axes, or by specifying the length of the major axis and the flattening.

Two quantities define an ellipsoid; these are usually given as the length of the semi-major axis, a, and the flattening,

where b is the length of the semi-minor axis.

ellipsoid distance As used in the Trimble Geomatics Office software, it is the length of the normal section between two points.

Ellipsoid distance is not the same as the geodesic distance.

ellipsoid height The distance, measured along the normal, from the surface of the ellipsoid to a point.

fa b–( )

a----------------=

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 253

Page 278: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

entities Primary graphical elements that you can view and select from the graphics window.

Entities available in the Trimble Geomatics Office software are points, lines, arcs, curves, text, and annotations.

ephemeris A set of data that describes the position of a celestial object as a function of time. Each GPS satellite periodically transmits a broadcast ephemeris describing its predicted positions through the near future, uploaded by the Control Segment. Postprocessing programs can also use a precise ephemeris that describes the exact positions of a satellite in the past.

epoch The measurement interval of a GPS receiver. The epoch varies according to the survey type:

For real-time surveys it is set at one second. For postprocessed surveys it can be set to a rate of between one second and one minute

epoch interval The measurement interval used by a GPS receiver; also called a cycle.

error The difference between the measured value of a quantity and its true value. Surveying errors are generally divided into three categories: blunders, systematic errors, and random errors. Least squares analysis is used to detect and eliminate blunders and systematic errors, and least squares adjustment is used to measure and properly distribute random error.

error ellipse A coordinate error ellipse is a graphical representation of the magnitude and direction of the error of network adjusted points.

254 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 279: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

events A record of the occurrence of an event, such as the closing of a photogrammetric camera’s shutter. A GPS receiver can log an event mark containing the time of the event and an alphanumeric comment entered through the keypad to describe the event. An event can be triggered through the keypad or by an electrical signal input on one of the receiver’s ports.

FastStatic A method of GPS surveying using occupations of up to 20 minutes to collect GPS raw data, then postprocessing to achieve sub-centimeter precisions. Typically the occupation times vary based on the number of satellites (SVs) in view:

4 SVs take 20 minutes*

5 SVs take 15 minutes*

6 or more SVs take 8 minutes*

(*collected at a 15 second epoch rate)

Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl) file

A text file that contains the definitions of feature codes, attributes, CAD styles, and control codes.

feature codes Descriptive words or abbreviations that describe the features you see.

field codes Special instructions that tell the Trimble Geomatics Office software to insert information into reports, files, and annotations.

Field codes are used to handle the transfer of database data in ASCII import/export/report operations.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 255

Page 280: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

final solution When postprocessing is used to generate GPS vectors, particularly for static solutions, the baseline processor steps through different solutions using a variety of processing techniques and combinations of GPS measurements. In general each subsequent solution is better than the previous one. The final solution provides the best estimate of the GPS vector between two points.

fixed See constrained.

fixed coordinates Point coordinates that do not move when performing a network adjustment.

fixed solution A solution obtained when the baseline processor is able to resolve the integer ambiguity search with enough confidence to select one set of integers over another. It is called a fixed solution because the ambiguities are all fixed from their estimated float values to their proper integer values.

flattening A mathematical expression of the relative lengths of the major and minor axes of an ellipsoid.

flattening inverse An expression of the flattening that is easier to read and edit.

float solution A solution obtained when the baseline processor is unable to resolve the integer ambiguity search with enough confidence to select one set of integers over another. It is called a float solution because the ambiguity includes a fractional part and is non-integer.

free adjustment Performing a network adjustment in which no point (coordinate) is constrained. The network adjustment uses inner constraints.

frequency distribution

The size and spread of residuals in a data set. Graphically shown in histograms.

256 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 281: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

fully constrained A network adjustment in which all points in the network which are part of a larger control network are held fixed to their published coordinate values. Used to merge smaller with larger control networks and old to newer networks.

GDOP Geometric Dilution of Precision

The relationship between errors in user position and time, and errors in satellite range. See also DOP.

geodetic azimuth The angle between the geodetic meridian and the tangent to the geodesic line of the observer, measured in the plane perpendicular to the ellipsoid normal of the observer. Clockwise from north.

geodetic datum A mathematical model designed to fit part or all of the geoid. It is defined by the relationship between an ellipsoid and a point on the topographic surface established as the origin of a datum.The size and shape of an ellipsoid and the location of the center of the ellipsoid with respect to the center of the earth define world geodetic datums.

Various datums have been established to suit particular regions. For example, European maps are often based on the European datum of 1950 (ED-50). Maps of the United States are often based on the North American Datum of 1927 or 1983 (NAD-27, NAD-83). All GPS coordinates are based on the WGS-84 datum surface.

geographic (geodetic)coordinates

Latitude, longitude, and ellipsoid height.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 257

Page 282: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

geoid The surface of gravitational equipotential that closely approximates mean sea level. It is not a uniform mathematical shape, but is an irregular figure with an overall shape similar to an ellipsoid.

Generally, the elevations of points are measured with reference to the geoid. However, points fixed by GPS methods have heights established in the WGS-84 datum (a mathematical figure).

The relationship between the WGS-84 datum and the geoid must be determined by observation, as there is no single mathematical definition that can describe the relationship. You must use conventional survey methods to observe the elevation above the geoid, then compare the results with the height above the WGS-84 ellipsoid at the same point.

By gathering a large number of observations of the separation between the geoid and the WGS-84 datum (geoidal separation), grid files of the separation values can be established. This allows the interpolation of the geoidal separation at intermediate positions. Files containing these grids of geoidal separations are referred to as geoid models. Given a WGS-84 position that falls within the extents of a geoid model, the model can return the interpolated geoidal separation at this position.

geoid model A mathematical representation of the geoid for a specific area, or for the whole earth. The software uses the geoid model to generate geoid separations for your points in the network.

258 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 283: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

geoid observation A geoid separation, with its associated error, extracted from a geoid model. The Trimble Geomatics Office software network adjustment treats them as in the same way as any observation with an associated error. As the adjustment progresses the observations will become adjusted geoid observations.

geoid separation The distance between the ellipsoid and geoid at a given point.

geomatics The design, collection, storage, analysis, display, and retrieval of spatial information. The collection of spatial information can be from a variety of sources, including GPS and terrestrial methods. Geomatics integrates traditional surveying with new technology-driven approaches, making geomatics useful for a vast number of applications.

GPS Global Positioning System

GPS is based on a constellation of 24 satellites orbiting the earth at a very high altitude.

GPS baseline A three-dimensional measurement between a pair of stations for which simultaneous GPS data has been collected and processed with differencing techniques.

Represented as delta X, delta Y, and delta Z; or azimuth, distance, and delta height.

GPS observations A GPS baseline with its associated errors. As the adjustment progresses the observations become adjusted GPS observations.

GPS raw data The data collected by a GPS receiver for the purpose of processing at a later time. It can be in the form of a .dat file (Trimble raw data file format) or a RINEX file.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 259

Page 284: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

GPS time A measure of time used by the NAVSTAR GPS system. GPS time is based on Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) but does not add periodic leap seconds to correct for changes in the earth’s period of rotation.

grid A two-dimensional horizontal rectangular coordinate system, such as a map projection.

grid conversion The conversion between geographic and map projection coordinates.

grid distance The distance between two points that is expressed in mapping projection coordinates.

ground distance The distance (horizontal distance with curvature applied) between two ground points.

HDOP Horizontal Dilution of Precision

height measurement rod

A measuring tool supplied with an external GPS antenna and used for measuring the height of the antenna above a point.

HI Height of instrument.

Synonymous with antenna heights for GPS.

histogram A graphical display of the size and distribution of residuals in a network adjustment.

horizontalcontrol point

A point with horizontal coordinate accuracy only. The elevation or ellipsoid height is of a lower order of accuracy or is unknown.

horizontal distance The distance between two points, computed horizontally from the elevation of either point.

horizontal position A point with horizontal coordinates only.

260 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 285: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

independent Subnetworks, observations, and control points not connected by geometry or errors. This term is the opposite of correlated.

inner constraint A network adjustment computed without fixing any point coordinates. The Trimble Geomatics Office software uses the centroid of the network as an inner constraint.

integer ambiguity The whole number of cycles in a carrier phase pseudorange between the GPS satellite and the GPS receiver.

integer search GPS baseline processing, whether real-time or postprocessed, requires fixed integer solutions for the best possible results. The software which processes the GPS measurements used to derive a baseline does an integer search to obtain a fixed integer solution. The search involves trying various combinations of integer values and selecting the best results.

iono free Ionospheric free solution (IonoFree)

A solution that uses a combination of GPS measurements to model and remove the effects of the ionosphere on the GPS signals. This solution is often used for high-order control surveying, particularly when observing long baselines.

ionosphere The band of charged particles 80 to 120 miles above the earth’s surface. It affects the accuracy of GPS measurements if you measure long baselines using single-frequency receivers.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 261

Page 286: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

ionospheric modeling

The time delay caused by the ionosphere varies with respect to the frequency of the GPS signals and affects both the L1 and L2 signals differently. When dual frequency receivers are used the carrier phase observations for both frequencies can be used to model and eliminate most of the ionospheric effects. When dual frequency measurements are not available an ionospheric model broadcast by the GPS satellites can be used to reduce ionospheric affects. The use of the broadcast model, however, is not as effective as the use of dual frequency measurements.

iteration A complete set of adjustment computations that includes the formation of the observation equations, normal equations, coordinate adjustments, and computation of residuals.

kinematic surveying A method of GPS surveying using short Stop and Go occupations, while maintaining lock on at least four satellites. Can be done in real time or postprocessed to centimeter precisions.

known point initialization

Known point is used in conjunction with kinematic initialization. If two known points are available, the baseline processor can calculate an inverse between the two points and derive an initialization vector. This initialization vector, with known baseline components, is used to help solve for the integer ambiguity. If the processor is able to successfully resolve this ambiguity a fixed integer solution is possible, yielding the best solutions for kinematic surveys.

L1 The primary L-band carrier used by GPS satellites to transmit satellite data. Its frequency is 1575.42 MHz. It is modulated by C/A code, P code, and a Navigation Message.

262 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 287: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

L2 The secondary L-band carrier used by GPS satellites to transmit satellite data. Its frequency is 1227.6 MHz. It is modulated by P code and a Navigation Message.

label Information that you can assign to points in the project. They appear beside points helping you locate them easily. Labels are visible in Survey view and Plan view.

You can use the Trimble Geomatics Office software’s predefined label definition to label points (for example, with their names, feature codes, and elevations).

Labels use the same font and size as the ToolTips in your Microsoft Windows Appearance settings.

To assign labels to points in the database, use View / Point Labels.

layers A place to store data that has been grouped together.

Organizing data into layers in this way makes it easier to manage. You can have any number of layers in a project. To assign or reassign an entity to a layer, use the Properties window. A layer name can have up to 100 alphanumeric characters.

least squares A mathematical method for the adjustment of observations, based on the theory of probability. In this adjustment method, the sum of the squares of all the weighted residuals is minimized.

level observation A level observation is an observation in the field using a digital level.

level of confidence A measure of the confidence in our results, expressed in a percentage or sigma.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 263

Page 288: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

level of significance An expression of probability. A one-sigma (standard) error is said to have a level of significance of 68 percent. For one-dimensional errors, a 95 percent level of significance is expressed by 1.96 sigma, and a 99 percent level of significance is expressed by 2.576 sigma.

local ellipsoid The ellipsoid specified by a coordinate system. The WGS-84 coordinates are first transformed onto this ellipsoid, then converted to grid coordinates.

local geodetic coordinates

The latitude, longitude, and height of a point. The coordinates are expressed in terms of the local ellipsoid.

local geodetic horizon

At any point, a plane at the ellipsoid height of a given point which is parallel to the tangent plane to the ellipsoid at that point. Coordinate values for the local geodetic horizon are expressed as North, East, and Up. The LGH is used for rotating EC Cartesian Coordinate differences, before modeling a baseline on the ellipsoid. Azimuth values computed from LGH components must be corrected for skew normals as part of modeling on the ellipsoid.

loop closure Loop closures provide an indication as to the amount of error in a set of observations within a network.

A loop closure is calculated by selecting a point from which one or more observations were taken, adding one of those observations to the point’s coordinates, and calculating coordinates of the second point based on that observation. This process is repeated one or more times around a loop, finally ending at the original starting point. If there were no errors in the observations, the final calculated coordinate would be exactly the same as the original starting coordinate. By subtracting the calculated coordinate from the original coordinate a misclosure is determined. Dividing this error by the length of the line allows the error to be expressed in parts per million.

264 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 289: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

This technique can also be used between two different points when both points are known with a high degree of accuracy. This is also known as a traverse closure.

major axis See ellipsoid.

mapping angle The angle between grid north on a mapping projection and the meridian of longitude at a given point. Also know as convergence.

mapping projection A rigorous mathematical expression of the curved surface of the ellipsoid on a rectangular coordinate grid.

mean sea level The mean height of the surface of the ocean for all stages of the tide. Used as a reference for elevations.

minimally constrained

A network adjustment in which only enough constraints to define the coordinate system are employed. Used to measure internal consistency in observations.

minor axis See ellipsoid.

modeling Expressing an observation and its related errors mathematically and geometrically on some defined coordinate system, such as an ellipsoid.

multipath Interference (similar to ghosts on a television screen) that occurs when GPS signals arrive at an antenna after traveling different paths. The signal traveling the longer path yields a larger pseudorange estimate and increases the error. Multiple paths may arise from reflections from structures near the antenna.

narrow-lane A linear combination of L1 and L2 carrier phase observations (L1 + L2) that is useful for canceling out ionospheric effects in collected baseline data. The effective wavelength of the narrow-lane is 10.7 cm.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 265

Page 290: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

NAVDATA NAVDATA is the 1500-bit navigation message broadcast by each satellite. This message contains system time, clock correction parameters, ionospheric delay model parameters, and details of the satellite’s ephemeris and health. The information is used to process GPS signals to obtain user position and velocity.

network A set of baselines. See also subnetwork.

network adjustment Solution of simultaneous equations designed to achieve closure in a survey network by minimizing the sum of the weighted squares of the residuals of the observations.

The adjustment technique employed by the Trimble Geomatics Office software is sometimes called variation of coordinates, and at other times the method of indirect observations.

network status An indication that a particular observation will be included in the adjustment.

Network means that it is included in the adjustment

Non-network means that it is excluded from the adjustment.

NMEA National Marine Electronics Association

The NMEA 0183 Standard defines the interface for marine electronic navigational devices. This standard defines a number of strings referred to as NMEA strings that contain navigational details such as positions.

Most Trimble GPS receivers can output positions as NMEA strings.

normal In geodesy, the straight line perpendicular to the surface of the ellipsoid.

266 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 291: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

normal distribution curve

A graphical illustration of the theoretical distribution of random variables around an expected value according to probability theory. Used with histograms.

northing Northward reading of a grid value.

observation residual The correction applied to an observation, as determined by the adjustment.

observations See surveying observations.

occupation time The amount of time required on a station, or point, to achieve successful process of a GPS baseline. The amount of time will vary depending on the surveying technique, the type of GPS receiver used, and the precision required for the final results. Occupation times can vary from a couple of seconds (kinematic surveys) to several hours (control or deformation surveys that require the highest levels of precision and repeatability).

origin The intersection of axes in a coordinate system. The point of beginning.

orthometric height The distance between a point and the surface of the geoid. It is usually called the elevation.

OTF search method GPS baseline processing, whether real-time or postprocessed, requires fixed integer solutions for the best possible results. (See integer search.)

Historically, this search was done using measurements collected while two or more receivers were stationary on their respective points. Modern receivers and software can use the measurements collected while the roving receiver is moving. Because the receiver is moving, the data is described as collected On-the-fly (OTF) and the integer search using this data is an OTF search.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 267

Page 292: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

outlier An observation which is identified by statistical analysis as having a residual too large for its estimated error. The term derives from the graphical position of an observation in a histogram.

over-determined A network for which more measurements have been made than are necessary to compute the coordinates of the network. Related to redundancy.

P-code The precise code transmitted by the GPS satellites. Each satellite has a unique code that is modulated onto both the L1 and L2 carrier waves. The P-code is replaced by a Y-code when Anti-Spoofing is active.

parameter An independent variable in terms of which the coordinates of points on a line or surface are given. See unknowns.

parity A form of error checking used in binary digital data storage and transfer. Options for parity-checking include Even, Odd, or None.

PDOP Position Dilution of Precision

A unitless figure of merit expressing the relationship between the error in user position, and the error in satellite position. Geometrically, PDOP is proportional to 1 divided by the volume of the pyramid formed by lines running from the receiver to four satellites that are observed. Values considered ‘good’ for positioning are small, for example 3. Values greater than 7 are considered poor. Thus, small PDOP is associated with widely separated satellites.

PDOP is related to horizontal and vertical DOP by:

PDOP2 HDOP2 VDOP2+=

268 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 293: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

PDOP cutoff A receiver parameter specifying a maximum PDOP value for positioning. When the geometric orientation of the satellites yields a PDOP greater than the mask value, the receiver stops computing position fixes.

PDOP mask The highest PDOP value at which a receiver will compute positions.

phase center See antenna phase correction.

phase center models A model used to apply a correction to a GPS signal based on a specific antenna type. The correction is based on the elevation of the satellite above the horizon and models electrical variations in the antenna phase center location. These models are useful for eliminating errors introduced when identical antennas are not used at both the base and rover points. See also antenna phase correction.

plumbing The act of aligning the antenna or instrument along a vertical line (plumb line) perpendicular to the equipotential surface of earth’s gravity field.

point positions See autonomous positioning.

postprocess To process satellite data on a computer after it has been collected.

PPM Parts per million

A standardized representation of a scale error in distance measurements. A 1 PPM error would result in 1 millimeter of measurement error for every 1000 meters of distance traveled.

precise ephemeris See ephemeris.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 269

Page 294: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

precision A measure of how closely random variables tend to cluster around a computed value. High precision implies small residuals. Usually expressed as one part in, or alternatively, as parts per million.

PRN Pseudorandom number

A sequence of digital 1’s and 0’s that appear to be randomly distributed like noise, but that can be exactly reproduced. PRN codes have a low autocorrelation value for all delays or lags except when they are exactly coincident.

Each NAVSTAR satellite can be identified by its unique C/A and P pseudorandom noise codes, so the term PRN is sometimes used as another name for GPS satellite or SV.

probability A statistical percentage expressing what portion of a hypothetical number of observations will fall within the defined limits. Sometimes called level of significance.

probable value The adjusted value for observations and other quantities, assuming that the adjustment has been done correctly. The closest approximation to true value that is possible.

project The Trimble Geomatics Office software operates on data in projects. You can consider a project to be the workspace you are working in. New projects are always created from existing templates and inherit all the elements of the template. From this point on, all new work is saved only in the new project.

A project contains all of the raw observations, computed points, coordinate system definition, line work, text, and CAD styles.

project datum The datum associated with a project in the Trimble Geomatics Office software. All local coordinates are displayed using the project datum.

270 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 295: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

projection Used to create flat maps that represent the surface of the earth or parts of that surface.

propagated error Computed errors derived from estimated observational errors and expressed in terms of coordinate positions. Propagated coordinate errors may, in turn, be propagated into relative errors in azimuth, distance, and delta height between points.

Quality Acceptance test

One or more software evaluation tests performed on raw GPS measurement data to determine if the data passes or fails a set of tolerance values that you define. These tests either remove data from further processing or mark data requiring quality improvements.

QC records Quality Control records

QC records contain information about the quality of the measured GPS position. They are stored with the point record.

ratio During initialization, the receiver determines the integer number of wavelengths for each satellite. For a particular set of integers, it works out the probability that it is the correct set.

Ratio is the ratio of the probability of correctness of the currently best set of integers to the probability of correctness of the next-best set. Thus, a high ratio indicates that the best set of integers is much better than any other set. This gives us confidence that it is correct. The ratio must be above 5 for new point and OTF initializations.

RDOP Relative Dilution of Precision

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 271

Page 296: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

Real-Time kinematic A method of GPS surveying in real-time using short (Stop and Go) occupation, while maintaining lock on at least 4 satellites. This method requires a wireless data link between the base and rover receivers.

rectangular coordinates

Coordinates in any system in which the axes of reference intersect at right angles.

reduced column profile

An abbreviated version of the normal equations in which the equations are reordered to minimize the computer memory required to store all nonzero elements.

redundancy The amount by which a control network is overdetermined, or has more observations than are needed to strictly compute its parts.

redundancy number A measure of the degrees of freedom in a portion, rather than the entirety, of a control network.

redundant baselines A baseline observed to a point that has already been connected to the network by other observations. A redundant baseline can be either an independent reobservation of a previous measurement, or an observation to a point from another base. It is redundant because it provides more information than is necessary to uniquely determine a point. Redundant observations are very useful, however, in that they provide a check on the quality of previous measurements.

redundant observation

A repeated observation, or an observation which contributes to over-determining a network.

reference factor See standard error of unit weight.

reference frame The coordinate system of a datum.

reference station A base station.

272 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 297: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

reference variance The square of the reference factor.

relative errors Errors and precisions expressed for and between pairs of network-adjusted control points.

residual The correction, or adjustment, of an observation to achieve overall closure in a control network. Also, any difference between an observed quantity and a computed value for that quantity.

RINEX Receiver INdependent EXchange format

A standard GPS raw data file format used to exchange files from multiple receiver manufacturers.

RMS Root Mean Square

RMS expresses the accuracy of point measurement. It is the radius of the error circle within which approximately 70% of position fixes are found. It can be expressed in distance units or in wavelength cycles.

rotated meridian A zone constant for the oblique Mercator mapping projection.

rotation In transformations, an angle through which a coordinate axis is moved around the coordinate system origin.

rover Any mobile GPS receiver and field computer that is collecting data in the field. The position of a roving receiver can be differentially-corrected relative to a stationary base GPS receiver.

RTCM Radio Technical Commission for Maritime Services

A Commission established to define a differential data link for the real-time differential correction of roving GPS receivers. There are two types of RTCM differential correction messages, but all Trimble GPS receivers use the newer Type 2 RTCM protocol.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 273

Page 298: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

RTK Real-time kinematic

A type of GPS survey.

satellite geometry Position and movement of GPS satellites during a GPS survey.

scalar In least squares, a value applied to the variances (errors) based on the required level of confidence.

scalar weighting A process of applying a scalar to the estimated errors to achieve proper weighting of the observation. The three types of scalars available in a network adjustment in the Trimble Geomatics Office software are:

Default means that scalar is set to 1.00, initial estimated error remains the same

Alternative means that scalar is set to the Reference Factor of the previous adjustment

User-defined means that you can enter a value for the scalar

The scalar is applied to the observation errors using one of the following methods:

All Observations

Each Observation

Variance Component Groups

scale A multiplier used on coordinate and other linear variables, such as for map projections and transformations.

SDMS Survey Data Management System

A set of format definitions for the storage of survey data. AASHTO maintains this system.

274 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 299: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

Selective Availability (S/A)

Artificial degradation of the GPS satellite signal by the U.S. Department of Defense. Since 1st May 2000, Selective Availability has been turned off.

semi-major axis One-half of the major axis.

semi-minor axis One-half of the minor axis.

session A period during which one or more GPS receivers log satellite measure data.

set-up error Errors in tribrach centering or height of instrument at a control point.

sideshot An observed baseline with no redundancy.

sigma A mathematical symbol or term for standard error.

single-frequency A type of receiver that only uses the L1 GPS signal. There is no compensation for ionospheric effects.

site calibration A process of computing parameters which establishing the relationship between WGS-84 positions (latitude, longitude and ellipsoid height) determined by GPS observations and local known coordinates defined by a map projection and elevations above mean sea level. The parameters are used to generate local grid coordinates from WGS-84 (and vice-versa) real-time in the field when using RTK surveying methods.

skyplot A polar plot that shows the paths of visible satellites for the time interval selected for the graph. The elevation of the satellite is represented in the radial dimension and the azimuth is shown in the angular dimension. The result depicts the satellite’s path as it appears to an observer looking down from a place directly above the survey point.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 275

Page 300: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

solution types A description of both the data and techniques used to obtain baseline solutions from GPS measurements. Typical solution types include descriptions such as code, float, and fixed. These describe techniques used by the baseline processor to obtain a baseline solution. Solution types also may include descriptions such as L1, L2, wide-lane, narrow-lane, or ionospheric free. These describe the way the GPS measurements are combined to achieve particular results. For more information, see the references on GPS processing for a more in depth discussion of these terms and techniques.

slope distance The distance in the plane parallel to the vertical difference (slope) between the points.

SNR Signal-to-Noise Ratio

A measure of the strength of a satellite signal. SNR ranges from 0 (no signal) to around 35.

standard error A statistical estimate of error, according to which 68 percent of an infinite number of observations will theoretically have absolute errors less than or equal to this value.

standard error of unit weight

A measure of the magnitude of observational residuals in an adjusted network as compared to estimated preadjustment observational errors.

State Plane Coordinates

Special definitions of Transverse Mercator and Lambert conformal mapping projections adopted by statute in the USA. There is one set of such zones for NAD-27, and another for NAD-83.

static (surveying) A method of GPS surveying using long occupations (hours in some cases) to collect GPS raw data, then postprocessing to achieve sub-centimeter precisions.

276 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 301: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

static network The static network describes the geometry and order in which GPS baselines collected using static and fast static techniques are organized and processed. The baseline processor first examines the project for points with the highest quality coordinates, and then builds the processing network from those points. The result is a set of static baselines that are derived using accurate initial coordinates.

status Every observation and set of keyed-in coordinates for a point has a status field (available in the Summary page of the Properties window).

The status can be Enabled, Enabled as check, or Disabled:

Enabled observations and coordinates are always used by recomputation in determining the calculated position for the point.

Enabled as check observations and coordinates are only used if there are no Enabled ones

Disabled observations and coordinates are never used.

stochastic model A general reference to the techniques used to estimate errors in a network adjustment.

subnetwork A set of baselines connected together by common control points, and independent of (separate from) any other baselines. As used by the Trimble Geomatics Office software, a network may consist of one or more subnetworks, and any one subnetwork may consist of as few as one baseline and two control points.

Super-trak A Trimble proprietary method of processing the L2 signal when the P-code is encrypted.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 277

Page 302: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

surveyingobservations

Measurements made at or between control points using surveying equipment, including GPS receivers and conventional equipment.

SV Satellite Vehicle (or Space Vehicle)

symbols and line types

Symbols and line types are maintained using the Trimble Symbol and Line Type Editor utilities. Use these editors to create new symbols and line types as well as to edit existing ones. Symbols are stored in symbol libraries and line types are stored in line type libraries.

The Trimble Geomatics Office software uses the current system symbol and line type libraries. When saving an edited library you can make this the system library (if it is not already the current system library).

systematic errors An error that occurs with the same sign, and often the same magnitude, in a number of related observations.

tau (value) A value computed from an internal frequency distribution based upon the number of observations, degrees of freedom, and a given probability percentage (95%). This value is used to determine if an observation is not fitting with the others in the adjustment. If an observations residual exceeds the tau, it is flagged as an outlier. Known as tau lines in the histogram of standardized residuals, vertical lines left and right of the center vertical line.

tau criterion Allen Pope’s statistical technique for detecting observation outliers. For more information, see Pope (1976).

TDOP Time Dilution of Precision

terrestrial observation

A terrestrial observation is an observation in the field using a laser rangefinder or conventional instrument.

278 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 303: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

TOW Time of Week

TOW in seconds, from midnight Saturday night/Sunday morning GPS time.

tracking The process of receiving and recognizing signals from a satellite.

transformation The rotation, shift, and scaling of a network to move it from one coordinate system to another.

transformation group

A selected group of observations used to compute transformation parameters unique to that group of observations. Typically, the observations within the group are the same type with similar errors and measured using a common method.

transformationparameters

A set of parameters derived for a network adjustment or user-defined, that transform one datum to another. Typically with GPS the parameters are generated to transform WGS-84 to the local datum.

tribrach Centering device used for mounting GPS antennas and other survey instruments on survey tripods.

tribrach centeringerrors

The errors associated with centering (plumbing) the tribrach over the observed point. These errors are estimated. The estimate is based on surveying the quality of surveying methods and should be conservative.

tropo correction Tropospheric correction

The correction applied to a satellite measurement to correct for tropospheric delay.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 279

Page 304: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

tropo model tropospheric model

GPS signals are delayed by the troposphere. The amount of the delay will vary with the temperature, humidity, pressure, height of the station above sea level, and the elevation of the GPS satellites above the horizon. Corrections to the code and phase measurements can be made using a tropo model to account for these delays.

univariate A mathematical function describing the behavior of one-dimensional random errors, in:

angle

distance

difference in height

elevation

ellipsoid height

URA User Range Accuracy

A measure of the errors that may be introduced by satellite problems and Selective Availability (S/A) if a particular satellite vehicle (SV) is used. A URA of 32 meters indicates that S/A is enabled. The URA value is set by the Control Segment and is broadcast by the satellites.

unknowns The computed adjustments to coordinates and transformation parameters. Also used to compute observation residuals.

US National United States government agency that maintains the national geodetic datum and all geodetic survey control networks within the US and its territories.

US Survey Foot 1200/3937 meter. The official unit of linear measure for NAD-27.

280 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 305: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

UTC Universal Time Coordinated

A time standard based on local solar mean time at the Greenwich meridian. See also GPS time.

variance The square of the standard error.

variance component estimation

A least-squares technique for estimating the relative error of different portions of a network.

variance group One of the groups of observations for which variance component estimation is being used in a network adjustment.

variance-covariance matrix

The set of numbers expressing the variances and covariances in a group of observations.

VDOP Vertical Dilution of Precision

vector A three-dimensional line between two points.

vertical Similar to the normal, except that it is computed from the tangent plane to the geoid instead of the ellipsoid.

vertical adjustment A network adjustment of vertical observations and coordinates only.

vertical control point A point with vertical coordinate accuracy only. The horizontal position is of a lower order of accuracy or is unknown.

WAVE Weighted Ambiguity Vector Estimator

WAVE is the Trimble baseline processor. It computes GPS vectors from field observations made using static, FastStatic, or kinematic data collection procedures.

weight The inverse of the variance of an observation.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 281

Page 306: TGO Manual Vol1

Glossary

weighting strategy The collection of values used to augmentvariance-covariance matrices in the Trimble GeomaticsOffice software.

weights The set of weights, or the inverse of the variance-covariance matrix of correlated observations.

WGS-84 World Geodetic System (1984)

The mathematical ellipsoid used by GPS since January1987.

wide-lane A linear combination of L1 and L2 carrier phaseobservations (L1 - L2). This is useful for its low effectivewavelength (86.2 cm) and for finding integer ambiguitieson long baselines.

X, Y and Z In the Earth Centered Cartesian system, X refers to thedirection of the coordinate axis running from the systemorigin to the Greenwich Meridian; Y to the axis runningfrom the origin through the 90° east longitude meridian,and Z to the polar ice cap. In rectangular coordinatesystems, X refers to the east-west axis, Y to thenorth-south axis, and Z to the height axis.

Y-code Y-code is an encrypted form of the information containedin the P-code. Satellites transmit Y-code in place of P-code when Anti-Spoofing is in effect.

zenith delay The delay, caused by the troposphere, of a GPS signalobserved from a satellite directly overhead. As a satelliteapproaches the horizon, the signal path through thetroposphere becomes longer and the delay increases.

282 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 307: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

Symbols

#, wildcard 165*, wildcard 165.html 384?, wildcard 165

Numerics

3D control pointscolor of 150

A

A1 Viewer utility. See Trimble A1 Viewer utility 465

add 348adding

annotations 354annotations, using feature code

processing 319arcs 348attributes to feature codes 390attributes to points 388attributes to projects 381azimuths, manually 344CAD properties to a point 340coordinate systems 411, 417coordinate systems to .csd file 417curves 350

datum transformations 411, 414descriptions for points 341ellipsoids 411, 413entities 338entities, selecting layers 322entities, using feature code

processing 319feature codes to points 340field codes 476geoid models 411lines 345lines, using feature code

processing 319linework between points 345linework for observations 347points 338points with attributes 382points, by azimuth and distance 341points, manually by coordinates 338points, using feature code

processing 319site definitions 411symbols, to .sym file 437text to projects 352

adjusted qualityrecomputation 179, 490

adjustmenthorizontal 51

adjustmentshorizontal, computing 227inclined plane 228

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 283

Page 308: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

using a calibration in a sitevertical 51

vertical, computing 228vertical, including 228vertical, maximum inclination 233

annotation templates 322, 331, 426adding layers 326creating 332, 336, 426, 431deleting 335editing 335field codes in 331for lines and arcs 434for points, example 431from feature code processing 431predefined 331, 431specifying layers for 432viewing, how to 332, 431

annotations Also see entitiesadding 354adding using feature code

processing 319amount of text 334and labels 143default position 334defining 331field codes 470floating 334moving 334orientation of 333position of 331, 433specifying layers 334viewing 222viewing properties of 355

antenna detailsediting 212

Antenna filestransferring to the Trimble Survey

Controller software 101

version of Trimble Survey Controller software to transfer to 78

antenna heightsediting 211selecting points by 157

antenna models, NGS 468applying, GPS site calibrations 239arcs

Also see entitiesadding 348viewing properties of 350

ArcView (*.dbf/*.shp/*.shw) Shapefiles 397ArcView, export format 368ASCII data files

custom formats, importing 68importing 64

ASCII formatsexporting data to 367

ASCII formats, customexporting data 367

attributes 378.ddf files for projects 31.fcl files for projects 31adding to points 388adding to projects 381collecting 383collecting, .ddf files 98, 383, 385collecting, .fcl files 96creating 426creating custom reports 391cutting, or copying, and pasting points

with 389date recorded 398defining 378defining sets to collect 438deleting 389for feature codes 425horizontal precision 398importing with .dc files 381managing 189, 386

284 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 309: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

point elevation 398setting up projects for 381, 388, 425,

427, 443setting up projects for, how to 31setting up projects, .ddf files 381, 385time recorded 398types of 439using new feature codes in a

project 389viewing 386

AutoCAD files 366exporting 366

AutoCAD With Attributes (*.dxf) files 397AutoCAD with attributes, export format 368AutoCAD, export format 368Autodesk fieldbook, export format 369automatic feature code processing 30autonomous, method of measuring

coordinates 116azimuth

adding points by 341azimuth observations 199

survey details of 199viewing details 175

azimuth system, south 57azimuths

adding, manually 344

B

background maps 150backsight class, points 115Base Occupation page, for GPS

observations 193baseline processing

selection method for 151Baseline Processing module. See WAVE

Baseline Processing module 17

baselines, GPSdisabled, color of 149postprocessed, color of 149potential, color of 149

blocks, for symbols 371

C

C&G standard, export format 368CAD details

adding to a point 340of a point, viewing 188

CAD formatsexporting data to 367

CAD styles 322, 327assigning to entities 327creating 327, 331defining 327deleting 327deleting, how to 330editing 327, 330viewing 331

calculated positionsfor GPS baselines or points 33of points, recomputation 505

calibration point pairs 229one-dimensional 231selecting 229three-dimensional 228, 231two-dimensional 231

Calibration ReportAlso see system-generated reports

Calibration Report, sections of 235Calibration.html. See Calibration Reportcalibrations. See GPS site calibrationschanging

.fcl files 382coordinate systems 28, 40, 45coordinate systems, automatically 53

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 285

Page 310: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

geoid models 44geoid models for sites 52maximum error and iteration

count 233project properties 27status of observations 206view filters 145

check class, points 115Checkin folder 37, 445checking

data 140tolerance 33tolerances 33

classes, pointsTrimble Survey Controller

software 114CMM files, export format 368codes, field. See field codescollecting

attributes, .ddf files 98feature codes in the field 314

color settingsfor a project 148

colorsof flags 14of stations 149of symbols 329, 429

Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) files 89creating 89transferring 89version of Trimble Survey Controller

software to transfer tocommas

between point names 155components (NE,e,h)

quality of, recomputation 489computation summary, GPS site

calibrations 233

computingdatum transformations 226datum transformations, how to 226GPS site calibration parameters 232horizontal adjustment 227vertical adjustment 228

contextfield codes 471

control classpoints 115

control codes 426assigning to points 442creating 427, 442defining 442

control points3D, color of 150horizontal, color of 150importing 64vertical, color of 150

control qualityrecomputation 179, 490

control quality, fixedrecomputation 179

conventional observationsrecomputation 496viewing details 175, 191, 194

Convert to RINEX utility. See Trimble Convert to RINEX utility 455

Coordinate page, for points 178coordinate system database 40, 41, 45, 411,

419accessing 410selecting coordinate systems 45viewing 41

coordinate system definitionsusing datum grids in the field 89using geoid models in the field 83

coordinate system field codes 473coordinate system groups 417

286 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 311: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

coordinate systems (and zones) 39.csd file, using 419adding 411, 417changing 28, 40, 45changing automatically 53creating 410, 411default for projects 28defined 54defining 411, 417duplicating 417editing 411, 417from .dc files 40imported .dc file different to

project 112predefined 410recently-used, selecting 50saving as sites 58Scale factor-only 54selecting 28, 40, 43, 45, 47, 411selecting from the .csd file 45selecting geoid models for 44selecting sites 51using datum grids 89viewing 28viewing details 44, 48

coordinate systems, published 226coordinate systems, viewing details 239coordinates

adding points manually by 338and observations used for points 178entering for project location 60entering into the Trimble Geomatics

Office software 182entering, using Properties

window 182meaning and multiple observations,

recomputation 504methods used to measure 116qualities 116seeding, recomputation 495

status (enabled/disabled), recomputation 489

coordinates, keyed-in 485more than one set for a point,

recomputation 489quality, recomputation 488recomputation 484, 509

coordinates, multipleand observations, recomputation 502

copied, method of measuring coordinates 116

copying Also see cutting, or copying, and

pastingprojects 35

correction planes, for control point pairs 228corrections

sea level 54creating

.cdg files 89

.ddf files 98

.fcl files 316annotation styles 336annotation templates 332, 426, 431attributes 426CAD styles 327, 331control codes 427, 442coordinate systems 410, 411custom report formats 391custom reports 391datum transformations 411export formats 477feature and attribute libraries,

example 426feature codes 427feature codes with attributes 434GPS site calibration 51, 58layers 324, 326line styles 423, 431point styles 423, 426, 427

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 287

Page 312: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

point styles, example 327projects 24, 36selection sets, on import 125symbols 420, 421, 423symbols, example 421templates 36, 37

creating reports 358Current.csd. See coordinate system databasecurves

Also see entitiesadding 350viewing properties of 351

custom format definitionsitems in dialogs 475

custom formats 470ASCII data files, importing 68body 474footer 474header 474overview 474

custom reports 359creating 391creating for points with attributes 391creating formats 391running 391selecting points to report 391, 395

cutting, or copying, and pastingentities 355points with attributes 389

D

dashesbetween point names 155

dataadding to database,

recomputation 484checking 140displaying in zoom navigator 13editing, recomputation 484

organizing. See layerstools for analysis 214

data collector, exporting survey data to 367Data Dictionary (*.ddf) files 385

collecting attributes 383, 385creating 98exporting to Trimble Survey

Controller software 385for projects with attributes 31line features 385setting up projects for attributes 381,

385, 444transferring 98version of Trimble Survey Controller

software to transfer to 78Data Dictionary Editor software 378, 381,

385creating .ddf files 98

data filesimporting 338

Data Transfer utility. See Trimble Data Transfer utility

data, postprocessed kinematic 126 Also see GPS Data (*.dat) files

data, static 126data, survey

exporting to a file or data collector 367

databasecoordinate system 40, 41, 45tables 382

date, attributes 439Datum Grid (*.cdg) files

Also see Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) files

Datum Grid (*.dgf) filescreating 467

datum gridsimporting .dc files, wrong for .cdg

file 113

288 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 313: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

using in a coordinate system 89using in the field in coordinate system

definition 89Datum Transformation Parameters section,

Calibration Report 236datum transformations

adding 411, 414computing 226computing, how to 226creating 411editing 411predefined 226

DC File Editor utility. See <DefaultParaFont>Trimble DC File Editor utility

default.fcl files 423, 424, 427, 436coordinate system selected for

projects 28elevations 53geoid models 49layer 322projections. See default Transverse

Mercator projectiondefault elevation

recomputation 513default Transverse Mercator projection 40,

45, 55creating projects 54defining 56importing .dat files, undefined 125importing .dc files, undefined 113selecting geoid models 44undefined 53

definingannotations 331attributes 378coordinate systems 411, 417line styles 420

deleted class, points 115

deletingannotation templates 335attributes 389CAD styles 327CAD styles, how to 330layers 326projects 34projects, retrieving 35

delta elevation 343descriptions, for points

adding 341Design Points – As Staked report 361devices 401

deleting 409managing 409setting up for Trimble Data

Transfer 402transferring data to 401types for the Data Transfer utility 402viewing properties of 409

dialogs, appearing when importing 69digital level files, importing 131digital levels, supported by the software 131Digital Terrain Model (*.dtx) files

transferring 99distance

adding points by 341units to use 342

distance recomputations 33drag-and-drop

importing .dat files from computer to project 122

importing .dc files from computer to project 109

importing files to a project 64drawing

palette 421size 421symbols 421tools 421

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 289

Page 314: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

DTM pointsversion of Trimble Survey Controller

software to transfer to 78duplicate points. See points, duplicateduplicating

records 411, 412Dynamically Linked Library (*.dll) files 68

E

easting and northingused in calibration computation 231

editing.dc files 444.fcl files 425annotation templates 335antenna heights 212CAD styles 327, 330CAD-related properties of

entities 213coordinate systems 411, 417data, recomputation 484datum transformations 411ellipsoid records 411ellipsoids 411geoid models 411layers 325Locked property of layers 14multiple entities 209multiple entities, selection method

for 151point details 176point details, survey 177site definitions 411survey data 206survey-related properties of an

entity 211symbols and line types 420view filters 14Visible property of layers 14

editing antenna heights 211elevation

delta 343elevations 224

determining for GPS points 42null 50specifying default for projects 53

elevations, default. See default elevationEllipse Controls toolbar 18ellipses

between point names 155ellipsoid heights 42, 43ellipsoid records

editing 411ellipsoid, WGS-84 86ellipsoids

adding 411, 413creating 412editing 411

enteringproject location coordinates 60

entitiesadding 338adding using feature code

processing 319adding, selecting layers 322assigning CAD styles 327changing styles of 19cutting, or copying, and pasting 355deselecting 152editing CAD-related properties 213editing multiple, selection method

for 151editing survey-related properties 211hiding, in layers 325multiple, editing 209viewing 173

entities, how displayed 322entities, linework

viewing 219

290 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 315: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

entities, selectedexporting 367

entities, selecting 140entities, selecting all 152entities, selecting, in layers 324entities, selecting, in specified layers 164entities, selecting, in the Plan view 163entities, selecting, methods 151entities, selecting, using queries 166entities, selecting, with the mouse 152Error Estimate page, for points 178, 187error flags 15error messages

importing .dat files 125importing .dc files 112, 113

errorsin data, viewing 202reported in system-generated

reports 32Errors and Warning section, Recompute

Report 515errors, estimated 178event marker, color of 150events data

viewing details 175exiting, the Trimble Geomatics Office

software 22exploding

merged points 127Export folder 445export formats 366

Also see custom formatscreating 477GIS 397

exporting.ddf files to Trimble Survey Controller

software 385.fcl files to survey controller 383AutoCAD files 366data to ASCII and CAD formats 367

NGS Bluebook files 372points and attributes to GIS

formats 367project database 367selected entities 367survey data to a file or data

collector 367to data in a custom ASCII format 367to third party software formats 365

F

false northings and eastings 57updated 54

FastStatic baselinesdirection of 207

FastStatic baselines, viewing details 191FCpro.htm. See feature code-processing

reportFeature and Attribute Editor utility. See

Trimble Feature and Attribute Editor utility

feature and attribute libraries 378changing 382creating 316creating, example 426default 423, 424, 427, 436defining CAD styles 327exporting to survey controller 383for collecting feature codes and

attributes 96for processing feature codes 314, 315,

316for projects with attributes 31from TRIMMAP 315importing .dc files, different to

project 113in the field 382processing 423

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 291

Page 316: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

processing feature codes 427projects, setting up for attributes 425saving 427, 443selecting 381, 382transferring to Trimble Survey

Controller software 96, 314, 315, 383, 443

using in Trimble Geomatics Office software 443

Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl) files Also see feature and attribute librariesversion of Trimble Survey Controller

software to transfer to 78feature code processing 316, 425, 443, 444

.fcl files 314, 315, 427adding annotation templates 431assigning styles to points and

lines 425automatically 30by selection 319feature and attribute libraries 316layers, selecting 322selection method for 151selection set 316, 317undoing 318

feature code-processing report (FCpro.html) 319

choosing the way you are notified 319

locating and opening 320feature codes 385, 425, 426, 427

adding layers 326adding to points 340attributes 425collecting in the field 314collecting, .fcl files 96creating 427, 434descriptions of 434entering in the Properties

window 314, 315

layers for 437procedures for points 425processing 316processing automatically 30processing. See feature code

processingfeature codes with attributes

using new in a project 389features 385

lines, in .ddf files 385points 385setting up projects for 30

field codesaccessing 470adding 476context 471coordinate system 473elements of syntax 470in annotation templates 331modifiers 472name 471options 472overview 470project 473

field codes, system 473field fill-in, how to use 339files

AutoCAD 366AutoCAD, exporting 366Background Map 150digital level, importing 131Dynamically Linked Library (*.dll).

See Dynamically Linked Library (*.ddl) files

exporting survey data to 367Geoid Grid (*.ggf). See Geoid Grid

(*.ggf) filesimporting to a project more than

once 70importing to a project, example 75

292 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 317: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

Latitude Grid (*.cdg). See Latitude Grid (*.dgf) files

Linetype.ltp 327Longitude Grid (*.dgf). See Longitude

Grid (*.dgf) filesMeterological 129National Geodetic Survey (NGS) Data

Sheet. See National Geodetic Survey (NGS) Data Sheet files

Navigation Message 129NGS Bluebook 372Observation Data 129RINEX. See RINEX filesRINEX. See Trimble Convert to

RINEX utility 455Survey Controller (*.dc). See Survey

Controller (*.dc) filesSymbols.dxf 371Symbols.sym 327, 371transferring to the Trimble Survey

Controller software 78, 79transferring to the Trimble Survey

Controller software, how to 79TRIMMAP graphics 366World 150

files, ASCII datacustom formats, importing 68importing 64

files, projectstored in specified folder 25

files, rotation of 150filters, view 143Flag icon, in status bar 14flagged observations

color of 149flags

colors of 14error 15suppressing 14

flags, warning 202

floating annotations 334folder structure 7folders

Checkin 37, 445Export 445for projects 445Reports 32, 317, 320

formatof .dc file to be created 80

formatsexport 366RINEX file 129selecting 29

formats, custom Also see custom formatsbody 474footer 474header 474

FTP site xvii, xxi

G

geographic information system (GIS)export formats 397formats, exporting points and

attributes to 367Geoid Grid (*.ggf) files 42, 83

creating 467importing .dc files, wrong geoid

model for 113size of file to be created 85transferring to Trimble Survey

Controller software 83, 88version of Trimble Survey Controller

software to transfer to 78geoid indicator, Properties window 180Geoid Model Definition section, Calibration

Report 237geoid models 40, 42

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 293

Page 318: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

adding 411area defined by 85changing 44changing for sites 52choosing default for a coordinate

system 419converting between heights and

elevations 43default 49determining elevation for GPS

points 42editing 411for a default Transverse Mercator

projection 44for coordinate systems 44importing .dc files, wrong .ggf

file 113selecting 43subgridding 83using as part of the coordinate system

definition in the field 83viewing properties 49, 58

geoid models, quality 34geoid separations 86

viewing 42geoid-ellipsoid separations. See geoid

separationsgeomatics, definition 2GPS Baseline Processing Report 17GPS baselines

calculated positions for 33direction of, recomputation 495multiple 33selecting by baseline precision 160

GPS Data (*.dat) filesimporting from the Trimble Survey

Controller software 118importing from your computer 122

GPS Data (*.dat) files, importing 118drag-and-drop 122

from a GPS receiver 119messages and dialogs 125points with duplicate names 127

GPS loop closures 205GPS observations

determining positions for, recomputation 494

disabling 192pages in Properties window forusing for a recomputation 206using in a network adjustment 192viewing details 175, 191, 192

GPS occupations 178viewing details 193

GPS points 229determining elevation using a geoid

model 42GPS positions

collecting 426GPS receiver device

Also see devicessetting up 405

GPS receiver. See Trimble GPS receiverGPS site calibration, recomputation 512GPS site calibrations 42, 43, 58, 224, 232

analyzing parameters 232applying 239computation summary 233computation summary

parameters 233computing parameters 232creating 51, 58example 240finding problem point pairs 234performing 58point pairs, errors 234report 235selecting calibration components 224using in future projects 239using saved 239

294 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 319: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

GPS site calibrations, parametersanalyzing 233

GPS Solution (APC) page, for points 178GPS vectors. See GPS baselinesGPS WAAS, method of measuring

coordinates 116graphics window 10–14

color of 149Grid Factory utility. See Trimble Grid

Factory utility 467grid lines

viewing 147grid points 229ground scale factor, setting 61

H

heights, ellipsoid 42, 43heights, WGS-84 224Help 6

printing topics 6utilities 400

Help, context-sensitive xvi, xxHidden Layers icon, in the status bar 14High reference variance (GPS Post

Processing), warning message 205High RMS (GPS Post Processing), warning

message 205HighRMS (RTK), warning message 204horizontal adjustment

computing 227including 228scale factor 233

Horizontal Adjustment Parameters section, Calibration Report 237

horizontal adjustments, GPS site calibration 51

horizontal components, quality for recomputation 509

horizontal control pointscolor of 150

horizontal residual, maximum 233HTML viewer 358hyphens

in point names 155

I

icons, in the status bar 14import formats See custom formatsimport reports 73, 136

Messages section 137parts of 136Project Details section 137Recompute Report 137

Import.html. See imported files reportimported files reports 73, 136importing

.dc files 52

.dc files containing attributes 384ASCII data files 64attributes, with .dc files 381control points 64data files 338data files, selection sets 169digital level files 131files to a project 66files to a project, drag-and-drop 64files to a project, more than once 70files to a project, Pacsoft example 75messages and dialogs that may

appear 69National Geodetic Survey (NGS) Data

Sheet filesquality of points 67selection sets created 70

importing, .dat files 118drag-and-drop 122

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 295

Page 320: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

error messages 125from a GPS receiver 119from the Trimble Survey Controller

software 118from your computer 122messages and dialogs 125points with duplicate names 127undefined default Transverse

Mercator projection 125importing, .dc files

different coordinate systems 112different feature and attribute

libraries 113error messages 112, 113from computer to project 110from computer to project, drag-and-

drop 109from the Trimble Survey Controller

software 106into the Trimble Geomatics Office

software 106messages and dialogs that appear 112undefined default Transverse

Mercator projection 113wrong .cdg file for datum grid 113wrong geoid model for .ggf file 113

installingTrimble Grid Factory utility, how

to 467inverse, between two points

displaying 214Inverse.html report 216iteration count, changing 233

K

keyed-in control, method of measuring coordinates 116

keyed-in normal, method of measuring coordinates 116

kinematic baselines, postprocessedviewing details 191

L

L1 Code, method of measuring coordinates 116

labelsand annotations 143field codes 470for points 142

laser rangefinder observationscolor of 149details of 197disabling 198recomputations 496status of 198values 198viewing details of 175, 191

Latitude Grid (*.dgf) files 89Layer Selection tool 322layer, default 322layers 322

adding in annotation templates 326adding in feature codes 326creating 324, 326deleting 326editing 325editing Locked property of 14editing visible property of 14hiding entities 325locking 325managing 323selecting 322selecting all entities in 164selecting entities in 324specifying for annotation

templates 432specifying for annotations 334

layers, for feature codes 437

296 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 321: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

least squares method 227, 228level observations

viewing details 175, 191Level report 362line features

in .ddf files 385line styles 426, 427

Also see CAD stylesassigning to lines, arcs, curves 425creating 423, 431defining 420

line types 420, 423editing 420

line types, predefined 427lines

Also see entities Also see lineworkadding 345adding using feature code

processing 319how displayed 442viewing properties of 347

Linetype.ltp files 327Linetype.ltp See feature and attribute

libraries, defaultlinework

Also see arcs Also see curves Also see linesadding between points 345adding for observations 347viewing properties of 346

Locked Layers icon, in the status bar 14Longitude Grid (*.dgf) files 89Loop Closure Reportloop closures, GPS. See GPS loop closuresLow ratio (GPS Post Processing), warning

message 205

M

MapInfo (*.mif/*.mid) files 397MapInfo, export format 368mapping quality

recomputation 179, 490marker, event, color of 150maximum error, changing 233mean sea level 42meaning

position of sideshot points, rules 504menu, attributes 439menus

shortcut 21merging

duplicate points, warning flags 72messages

received on import 69warning 53, 204, 384

Messages section, import reports 137Meterological file 129Microstation (*.dgn) files 397Microstation, export format 368misclosure

warning message, viewing 178misclosures 14, 15mouse pointers. See pointers, shapes 22moving

points, recomputation 512multiple

GPS baselines 33observations 33

Multiple failures (GPS Post Processing), warning message 205

multiple sideshot observations, recomputations 33

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 297

Page 322: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

N

namefield codes 471

National Geodetic Survey (NGS) Data Sheet files, importing 130

Navigation Message file 129Network Adjustment module 18

opening a project created with 26Network Adjustment Report 18network adjustment styles 18network-adjusted points

color of 150New Project shortcut, in the project bar 24New Project tool 24NGS antenna models 468NGS Bluebook Export, format 368NGS Bluebook files 372normal class, points 115northing and easting

used in calibration computation 231note records

viewing 218null elevations 50numeric, attributes 439

O

Observation Data file 129Observation page

for conventional observations 195, 197, 200

for GPS observations 193for laser rangefinder observations 198for reduced observations 201

Observation Statistics pagefor GPS observations 193, 195

observations Also see conventional observations Also see GPS observations

Also see laser rangefinder observations

Also see reduced observationsadding linework for 347and coordinates used for points 178changing status 206disabling 195, 197enabled as a check, color of 149misclosures 14, 15multiple 33multiple sideshot, recomputations 33quality 117recomputation 484, 509selecting 158selecting from or to a specified

point 159viewing details 175viewing details of 191

observations, azimuth. See azimuth observations

observations, multipleand coordinates, recomputation 502and meaning coordinates,

recomputation 504to sideshot points, recomputation 503

observations, raw GPSprocessing 17

Occupations and Setups pages, for points 178

occupations, GPS 178viewing details 193

online Help xvi, xxOpen Project shortcut, in the project bar 26Open Project tool 26opening

projects, how to 26Properties window 173Summary page in Properties

window 180system-generated reports 320

298 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 323: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

templates 38utilities 400

optionsfield codes 472

originupdating default Transverse Mercator

projection 227Out-of-Tolerance Closure (recomputation),

warning message 204Out-of-Tolerance Observation

(recomputation), warning message 204

P

Pacsoft export format 369Pacsoft files

importing to a project, example 75pages, Properties window. See Properties

windowPan mode, pointer 22Pan tool 141parameters, calibration

analyzing 232, 233computation summary 233computing 232for vertical adjustment 228

parameters, vertical shift 228pasting. See cutting, or copying, and pastingPC cards, Trimble Survey Controller 401Plan view 10, 19

selecting entities 163using 321

plane adjustment, inclined 228plane transformations 227planes, correction for control point pairs 228plot scale, specified 329Point Derivation Report

generating 180viewing 180

Point Derivation Report, example 181Point Derivations section, Recompute

Report 516point features 385point pairs, calibration 229

errors 234finding problem pairs 234problem with 233selecting 229, 230three-dimensional 228, 231

Point Residuals, Calibration Report 238point styles 426, 427

Also see CAD stylesassigning to points 420, 425creating 423, 426, 427creating, example 327defining settings for 428selecting 437

point styles, size 429point symbols 327, 420pointers, shapes 22points

Also see entities Also see recomputation#, wildcard 165*, wildcard 165?, wildcard 165adding 338adding by azimuth and distance 341adding descriptions for 341adding feature codes to 340adding using feature code

processing 319adding, manually by coordinates 338alphanumeric names 155arcs between, adding 348assigning qualities to 126backsight class 115CAD properties, adding to 340calculated positions for 33

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 299

Page 324: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

calculating position 505check class 115classes, Trimble Survey Controller

software 114color of 149commas between names 155control class 115control codes for 442coordinates, methods used to

measure 116dashes between names 155deleted class 115details of, Properties window 176details, survey 177determining quality of,

recomputation 510displaying inverse between two 214ellipses between names 155entering coordinates for using

Properties window 182entering coordinates into the Trimble

Geomatics Office software 182entering traverses 343exploding merged 127exporting to GIS formats 367how displayed 442hyphens in names 155labels for 142lines between, adding 345linework between, adding 345managing attributes for 189more than one set of keyed-in

coordinates, recomputation 489moving, recomputation 512normal class 115pages in Properties window for 178procedures for feature codes 425quality of coordinates 116quality, selecting for import 67selecting 153

selecting by antenna height 157selecting by GPS quality 156selecting by name 154selecting by name, rules for 155selecting by name, wildcards 165stake class 115stakeout information 187stakeout information, viewing 186viewing CAD details 188viewing details of 175viewing details, selection method

for 151viewing observations and coordinates

used for 178viewing qualities 178

Points Report 359points with attributes

adding to projects 382creating custom reports for 391cutting, or copying, and pasting 389

points, calculating position, determining criteria for 489

points, calibrationselecting 163

points, duplicatemanaging 117merging 73merging, warning flags 72renaming 72, 189selecting 161selection method for 151

points, GPS 229determining elevation using a geoid

model 42points, grid 229points, network adjusted

color of 150points, sideshot

multiple observations to, recomputation 503

300 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 325: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

rules for meaning position of, recomputation 504

points, stakedselecting 162

points, starting. See starting pointspoints, traverse

recomputations 508points, WGS-84

relationship with grid points 224positions

calculated for GPS baselines or points 33

GPS, collecting 426Postprocessed Kinematic (PPK) vectors

color of 149postprocessed kinematic data

Also see GPS Data (*.dat) filesimporting 126

PPK Continuous vectorscolor of 149

processingraw GPS observations 17

processing feature codes. See feature code processing

projectproperties of 27

project bar 12 Also see zoom navigator 12groups 12New Project shortcut 24Open Project shortcut 26opening a project 26parts of 12shortcuts 12showing or hiding 13utilities, opening 400

project bar, creating a project 24project databases

exporting 367

Project Details section, Calibration Report 236

Project Details section, import reports 137Project Details section, Recompute

Report 515project field codes 473project files

in specified folder 25projection parameters

calculated 57projections

default. See default Transverse Mercator projection

projects 24adding attributes 381adding points with attributes 382changing .fcl files 424changing coordinate systems 28changing properties 27color settings 148coordinate systems for 39copying 35creating 24, 36default coordinate system for 28default elevation, recomputation 513defining CAD styles 327deleting 34entering location coordinates 60geoid models for 40importing files to 66importing files to, using drag-and-

drop 64opening, how to 26retrieving deleted 35selecting a template for 36selecting coordinate systems 43selecting unit values and format 29setting up 23setting up for attributes 381, 388,

425, 427, 443

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 301

Page 326: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

setting up for attributes, .ddf files 381, 385

setting up for attributes, how to 31setting up for features 30templates 40using new feature codes with

attributes in a project 389viewing, coordinate systems 28

projects, background colour of 429projects, folders 445projects, templates 36properties

coordinate system, viewing 48viewing geoid model 49

Properties window 172, 386assigning styles to points and

lines 425azimuth observations 199entering coordinates 182entering feature codes 314, 315geoid indicator 180layers, selecting 322opening 173opening Summary page 180pages 175pages for conventional observations

in 194, 197pages for GPS observations in 192pages for points in 178parts of 173point descriptions, viewing 436point details 176point details, survey 177Stakeout page 187

properties, attributes 441

Q

qualitiesassigning to points 126for points, viewing 178observations 117

qualitygeoid models 34hierarchy table, recomputation 492hierarchy, recomputation 490keyed-in coordinate,

recomputation 488keyed-in coordinates and

observations, recomputation 509of component (NE,e,h),

recomputation 489of coordinates 116of observed points, determining 510of points for importing 67selecting points by 156

queriesselecting entities 166

QuickPlan. See Trimble QuickPlan

R

Real Time Kinematic (RTK) base positionrecomputation 511

recomputationsadjusted quality 179, 490calculating position of points 505control quality 179, 490criteria for determining calculated

position 489default elevation 513determining calculated positions for

points 485determining observations to be

used. 206

302 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 327: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

determining positions for GPS observations 494

determining quality of observed points 510

direction of GPS baselines 495example 500fixed control quality 179flowchart 485GPS site calibration 512horizontal and vertical component

qualities 509keyed in coordinates and

observations 509keyed-in coordinates and

observations, quality 509keyed-in coordinates, quality 488mapping quality 179, 490meaning position of sideshot

points 504more than one set of keyed-in

coordinates 489moving points 512multiple observations and

coordinates 502multiple observations and meaning

coordinates 504multiple observations to sideshot

points 503multiple sideshot observations 33performing 14, 207, 484potential starting points,

determining 487potential starting points, position and

quality of 488quality hierarchy 490quality hierarchy table 492quality of component 489reversing GPS baselines 208RTK base positions 511seeding coordinates 495

settings 32status of coordinates 489survey quality 179, 490tolerance distance 505traverse points 508unknown quality 179, 490warning flags 513

recomputations, distance 33Recompute icon, in the status bar 14Recompute Report 206, 484, 513

Errors and Warnings section 515import reports 137parts of 514Point Derivations section 516Project Details section 515Traverse Report section 519

Recompute Report, Survey Data section 520recomputing

overview 484records

duplicating 411, 412user-defined 416, 419

reduced observations 191viewing details of 175, 200

release notes xvii, xxirenaming

duplicate pointsreport formats

Also see custom reportsreports

Also see custom reports Also see Point Derivation Report Also see system-generated reportadditional 359creating 358Design Points /= As Staked

report 361header 358header, changing information 27import 73, 136

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 303

Page 328: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

imported files 73, 136Inverse.html 216Level report 362links in 363Loop Closure. See Loop Closure

Reportmodifying 359point derivation details following

warning message 203Points 359Stakeout report 360

Reports folder 32, 317, 320Residual Differences Between GPS And

Known Coordinates section, Calibration Report 238

residualsmaximum horizontal 233maximum vertical 233

RINEX file format 129RINEX files 129

Also see Trimble Convert to RINEX utility 458

importing 129RMS, high

warning message, viewing 178rotation

of symbols 329rotation of files 150rotations 227Rover Occupation page, for GPS

observations 193RTK Continuous vectors

color of 149RTK GPS baselines

color of 149direction of 207viewing details 191

S

saving.fcl files 427, 443a template 38selection sets 168symbols, new 422

scale factor 57, 227horizontal adjustment 233

Scale factor only, coordinate system 54importing a .dc file 54

scale factor, ground 61scale, plot 329SDMS, export format 369SDR files, export format 369SDRMap coordinates, export format 369sea level

elevations 224sea level corrections 54

changing for terrestrial data 33sea level, mean 42seeding coordinates, recomputation 495selected entities

color of 149selecting

.fcl files 381, 382a template for a project 36calibration components 224calibration point pairs 229, 230calibration points 163coordinate systems 28, 40, 43, 45,

411coordinate systems and zones 47coordinate systems from the .csd

file 45coordinate systems in .dc files 52duplicate points 161entities 140entities in specified layers 164entities using queries 166entities with the mouse 152

304 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 329: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

entities, all 152entities, in layers 324entities, in the Plan view 163entities, methods 151flagged observations 14geoid model 43GPS observations by baseline

precision 160layer 322observations 158observations, from or to a specified

point 159point styles 437points 153points by antenna height 157points by GPS quality 156points by name 154points by name, rules for 155points to report 391, 395recently-used coordinate systems 50sites 51sites as coordinate systems 51staked points 162symbols 428unit values and format 29using wildcards to select multiple

point names 165selection methods 140selection set

feature code processing 316, 317selection sets 168

created on import 70, 125importing data files 169saved, retrieving 169saving 168viewing 114, 125

separations, geoid 86separators, between attributes 439sets, selection. See selection sets

setting upprojects 23projects for attributes 381, 388projects for attributes, .ddf files 385projects for features 30

settingsrecomputations 32

shortcut menus 21shortcuts, in project bar

New Project 24Open Project 26

site calibrations, GPS. See GPS site calibrations

site definitionsadding 411editing 411

siteschanging geoid model 44details, viewing 52saving coordinate systems as 58selecting 51selecting as coordinate systems 51

Sokkia SDR data collectorsviewing and editing files of 444

stake class, points 115Stakeout report 360STAR*NET 2D control points, export

formats 369STAR*NET 3D control points, export

formats 369STAR*NET observations, export

formats 369starting points

potential, determining for recomputations

potential, position and quality of 488starting, Trimble Geomatics Office

software 10Static baselines

direction of 207

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 305

Page 330: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

static baselinesviewing details 191

static data 126stations

color of 149status (enabled/disabled)

of coordinates, recomputation 489status bar 14

icons in 14styles, CAD. See CAD stylessubgridding

.ggf files 83Summary page, Properties window

for conventional observations 195, 197

for GPS observations 192for laser rangefinder observations 198for points 178for reduced observations 200, 201opening 180WGS-84 points 179

Summary, Calibration Report 238Survey Controller (*.dc) files 45, 106, 444

avoiding errors by transferring 80containing attributes, importing 384coordinate systems 40editing 444formatting of files to be created 80importing 52importing attributes 381importing with a Scale factor-only

coordinate system 54locating 445selecting coordinate systems from 52setting up project for attributes 444transferring to projects 314, 316version of Trimble Survey Controller

software to transfer to 78viewing 444

Survey Controller (*.dc) files, importingfrom computer to project 110from computer to project, drag-and-

drop 109from the Trimble Survey Controller

software 106into the Trimble Geomatics Office

software 106messages and dialogs that appear 112

survey dataediting 206source types 185viewing 146, 175

Survey Data Management System See SDMS

Survey Data section, Recompute Report 520survey quality

recomputation 179, 490Survey view 10, 15

on opening a project 26symbol files 422

as system library files 422, 423symbols 423

adding to .sym file 437blocks for 371color of 329, 429creating 420, 421, 423creating, example 421drawing 421editing 420orientation of 329, 430saving new 422selecting 428size 429size of 329

symbols, point. See point symbolssymbols, predefined 427Symbols.dxf files 371Symbols.sym. See feature and attribute

libraries, default

306 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 331: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

system field codes 473system library files

symbol files 422, 423system-generated reports

<filename>.html 384Calibration 235Calibration, sections of 235choosing how you are notified of 31choosing the way you are

notified 319feature code-processing report

(FCpro.html) 317, 319GPS Baseline Processing Report 17informing of errors 32locating and opening 320Network Adjustment 18

T

tablesin the database 382

Target Setup page, for conventional observations 195

templatesannotation. See annotation templatescreating 36, 37for a project 36, 40opening 38project, defining CAD styles 327saving 38selecting for a project 36

templates, for a project 24TERRAMODEL, export format 369terrestrial data

changing sea level correction for 33terrestrial observations

color of 149using for a recomputation 206

terrestrial positions

collecting 426terrestrial setup, from or to the point 178text

Also see entitiesadding to a project 352in project, orientation of 353viewing properties of 354

text stylesAlso see CAD stylesselecting for annotations 333

text, associated with entities. See annotationstext, attributes 439text, color of 149text, entity

viewing details 220time, attributes 439Timeline window 17tolerance checking 33tolerance distance, recomputation 505tolerance values 33toolbars

Ellipse Controls 18tools

Arc 421drawing 421for data analysis 214Layer Selection 322Line 421New Project 24Open Project 26zoom 13, 85, 141

ToolTips 21TPLANE, export format 369transferring

.cdg files 89

.dc files to projects 314, 316

.dc files, avoiding errors by 80

.ddf files 98

.dtx files 99

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 307

Page 332: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

.fcl files to Trimble Survey Controller software 96, 314, 383, 443

.ggf files 83Antenna files 101data to devices 401files to the Trimble Survey Controller

software 78Survey Controller (*.dc) files 80

transferring filesto the Trimble Survey Controller

software 79to the Trimble Survey Controller

software, how to 79transformations, plane 227translations 227Transverse Mercator projection, default 40,

45, 55, 226creating projects 54defining 56selecting geoid models 44undefined 53updating origin 227

traverse pointsmore than one observation,

recomputation 508Traverse Report section

Recompute Report 519traverses

entering for a point 343Trimble Convert to RINEX utility

Configuration dialog 457configuring

antenna information 459controls 463header information 461output files 458the RINEX conversion 457

creating conversion file 464defining header fields 461editing antenna information 460

filescreating conversion 464input 456output 455, 458types 455

Header Field Override dialog 462selecting

folders and files 456input files 456output folder 457

Trimble Coordinate System Manager utility.csd 411coordinate system groups 417coordinate systems 411

adding 417adding to .csd file 417creating 411duplicating 417editing 417

datum transformationsadding 414creating 411

ellipsoidsadding 413creating 412

geoid models for coordinate systems, choosing 419

recordsduplicating 411

records, ellipsoidediting 411

records, user-defined 416, 419viewing .csd 41

Trimble Data Exchange Format 369Trimble Data Transfer

devicesdeleting 409managing 409viewing properties of 409

GPS receiver device setting up 405

308 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 333: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

setting up devices 402transferring

data to devices 401Trimble Survey Controller device

setting up 403types of devices 402

Trimble Data Transfer utility 401Trimble DC File Editor utility 444

.dc files 444editing 444locating 445viewing 444, 445

Sokkia SDR data collectors, viewing and editing files of 444

Trimble DC File Editor window 445Trimble Feature and Attribute Editor

utility 425Annotation Template-Properties

Dialog 432annotation templates 426

creating 336, 426, 431for lines and arcs 434for points example 431from feature code

processing 431predefined 431specifying layers for 432viewing, how to 431

annotations, position of 433attributes

creating 426defining sets to collect 438

attributes, properties 441attributes, types of 439CAD styles

creating 331color settings 429control codes 426

assigning to points 442creating 427, 442

feature and attribute librariescreating, example 426editing 425processing 423saving 427, 443transferring to Trimble Survey

Controller software 443viewing 425

feature code processing, .fcl files 427Feature Code Properties dialog,

Attributes tab 440feature codes 426, 427

creating 427, 434descriptions of 434layers for 437

layerscreating 326

line styles 426, 427creating 423, 431

line types, predefined 427point descriptions, viewing 436point styles 426, 427

creating 423, 426, 427defining settings for 428selecting 437

point styles, size 429projects, setting up for attributes 427separators, between attributes 439symbol files, as system library

files 422, 423symbols

adding to .sym file 437creating 423selecting 428

symbols, orientation of 430symbols, predefined 427symbols, size 429Trimble Geomatics Office software,

linking 426using, example 426

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 309

Page 334: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

when and why to use 425Trimble GDM, export format 368Trimble Geomatics Office software

exiting 22folder structure 7getting started 6key features 2overview 2starting 10using 3workflow 4

Trimble Geomatics Office window 10–14 Also see project bar 12 Also see status bar 14 Also see zoom navigator 13

Trimble GPS receiver 401importing .dat files from 119

Trimble Grid Factory utility.ggf, creating 467installing, how to 467viewing geoid separations 42

Trimble Line Type Editor utility 420line styles, defining 420line types 420

editing 420projects, changing .fcl files 424

Trimble Pathfinder Office software 98Trimble QuickPlan

almanac, current ephemeris file 447creating sessions and defining

points 448defining a point 450defining the session 449displaying graphs 454exiting 455setting Auto Time parameters 452viewing reports 453viewing the Status Window 451when and why use 446

Trimble Survey Controller (*.dc) files

transferring 80Trimble Survey Controller device

Also see devicessetting up 403

Trimble Survey Controller softwarecollecting attributes 383exporting .ddf files 385exporting .fcl files to 383importing .dc files from 106PC card 401transferring .fcl files 383transferring .fcl files to 96, 315transferring Antenna files to 101transferring files to 78transferring Geoid Grid (*.ggf) files

to 88versions to transfer files to 78

Trimble Symbol Editor utility 420drawing

size 421tools 421

drawing palette 421point styles

assigning to points 420point symbols 420projects, changing libraries 424symbol file 422symbols

creating 420, 421creating, example 421drawing 421editing 420saving new 422

toolsArc 421Line 421

TRIMMAP.fcl files 315

TRIMMAP files 366TRIMMAP, export format 369

310 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 335: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

U

UK National Gridversion of Trimble Survey Controller

software to transfer to 78undefined default Transverse Mercator

projection 53unit values

selecting 29units of measurement

for distance 342unknown quality

recomputation 179, 490Updated Default Projection (Transverse

Mercator) Definition section, Calibration Report 236

UtilitiesQuickPlan 446

utilities 400A1 Viewer. See Trimble A1 Viewer

utility 465Convert to RINEX. See Trimble

Convert to RINEX utility 455Coordinate System Manager. See

Trimble Coordinate System Manager

Data Transfer. See Trimble Data Transfer utility

DC File Editor. See <DefaultParaFont>Trimble DC File Editor utility

Feature and Attribute Editor. See Trimble Feature and Attribute Editor

Feature and Attribute Editor. See Trimble Feature and Attribute Editor utility

Grid Factory. See Trimble Grid Factory utility 467

utilities, Help 400utilities, opening 400

V

valueslaser rangefinder observations 198tolerance 33

vectors, GPS. See GPS baselinesvertical adjustment

computing 228including 228maximum inclination 233parameters for 228

Vertical Adjustment Parameters section, Calibration Report 237

vertical adjustment, GPS site calibration 51vertical components, quality for

recomputation 509vertical control point

color of 150vertical residual, maximum 233vertical shift parameters 228view

annotation details 222properties of text 354

view filters 143changing 145editing 14

View Filters icon, in the status bar 14viewing

.csd 41

.dc files 444, 445

.fcl files 425annotation templates, how to 332,

431attributes 386CAD details of a point 188CAD styles 331coordinate system details 44, 48, 239coordinate systems 28entities 173erroneous data 202

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1 311

Page 336: TGO Manual Vol1

Index

geoid model properties 49, 58geoid separations 42GPS observation details 192grid lines 147linework entities 219note records 218observations 14observations and coordinates used for

points 178observations, details 175, 191Point Derivation Report 180point descriptions 436point details 175, 176point details, survey 177point qualities 178points 14reduced observation detailsselection sets 114, 125selection sets created on import 70site details 52survey data 146, 175text entity details 220warning messages 178, 202

viewing, propertiesof lines 347

viewing, properties ofannotations 355arcs 350curves 351linework 346

viewsPlan 10, 19Survey 10, 15switching between Plan and

Survey 10

W

warning flags 202warning flags, recomputation 513

warning messages 53, 204, 384viewing 178, 192, 200, 202

Warning page, for GPS observations 192, 200

Warning page, for points 178WAVE Baseline Processing module 17

opening a project created with 26WAVE GPS baseline processing module

RINEX files 129WAVE processing styles 17WGS-84

ellipsoid 86heights 224points, relationship with grid

points 224WGS-84 points, in Summary page of

Properties window 179wildcards

# 165* 165? 165selecting multiple point names 165

WILDsoft, export format 369window

graphics 10–14Properties 172Trimble Geomatics Office 10–14

World files 150world wide web site xv, xix

Z

Zeiss Rec E/M5, export format 369zoom navigator 13

showing or hiding 13using 13using a mouse with a wheel 13

zoom tools 13, 85, 141

312 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1

Page 337: TGO Manual Vol1

Reader Comment FormTrimble Geomatics Office User Guide – Volume 1January 2001 Part Number 39328-10-ENG Revision A

We appreciate your comments and suggestions for improving this publication.

I use the following Trimble product______________________________________________

for ________________________________________________________________________

Please circle a response for each of the statements below:1 = Strongly Agree 2 = Agree 3 = Neutral 4 = Disagree 5 = Strongly Disagree

The manual is well organized. 1 2 3 4 5

I can find the information I want. 1 2 3 4 5

The information in the manual is accurate. 1 2 3 4 5

I can easily understand the instructions. 1 2 3 4 5

The manual contains enough examples. 1 2 3 4 5

The examples are appropriate and helpful. 1 2 3 4 5

The layout and format are attractive and useful. 1 2 3 4 5

The illustrations are clear and helpful. 1 2 3 4 5

The manual is: too long just right too short

Please answer the following questions:Which sections do you use the most? ____________________________________________

What do you like best about the manual? _________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

What do you like least about the manual? _________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Optional

Name _____________________________________________________________________

Company __________________________________________________________________

Address____________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Telephone ____________________________ Fax____________________________________

Please mail to the local office listed on the back cover or to Trimble Navigation Limited, 645 North Mary Avenue, P.O. Box 3642, Sunnyvale, CA 94088-3642. Alternatively, e-mail your comments and suggestions to [email protected]. All comments and suggestions become the property of Trimble Navigation Limited.

Page 338: TGO Manual Vol1